JP2023099710A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A plurality of kinds of game states exist as game states and a normal section and an advantageous section exist as game sections. The advantageous section is set with setting of SB winning data or establishment of first BB prize winning as an opportunity in the normal section, and shift lottery processing to an RT state is executed when the advantageous section is set. In this case, the shift lottery processing to the RT state is executed in a mode corresponding to a game state at that point of time in a first game started after the advantageous section is set. When the SB winning data is set in a state after a bonus and in a situation of the normal section, a situation that is in a first preparation state and is in the advantageous section can be achieved. Setting of the SB winning data in a situation that is in the RT state and is in the normal section is more advantageous than setting of the SB winning data in another situation.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

A slot machine is one type of gaming machine. The slot machine has a plurality of reels, and a part of the plurality of symbols provided on the outer periphery of each reel can be visually recognized through a display window. When a player bets game media such as medals and operates a start lever, each reel starts rotating, and after each reel starts rotating, each reel stops sequentially by operating a stop button. .

In addition, inside the slot machine, a lottery is performed on condition that the game medium is bet and the start lever is operated. A predetermined number of game media are paid out on the condition that the game is stopped (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2014-045989 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The above problems are not limited to slot machines, but also apply to gaming machines that use game balls as game media, for example.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 sets the game section to the second section under at least one condition that a specific event has occurred in a situation where the game section is the first section. ,
a process executing means for executing a profit giving process based on the fact that the game section is set to the second section;
state transition means for transitioning from the specific state to another game state under at least one condition that the specific event occurs in a situation where the game state is the specific state;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized through the display window; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; (a) It is a front view of a common display area, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on a combined display part. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device and the display content of the stop order on the combined display unit; FIG. 1 is an electrical configuration diagram of a slot machine; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a lottery process for a winning combination executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for a normal state, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for a BB state. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing executed by the main MPU; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a game state that exists in the present slot machine. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of winning data set to index value = 7 in the lottery table for normal state, and (b) is set to index value = 7 in the lottery table for post-bonus state. (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of winning data set to index values = 7 to 13 in the lottery table for the first preparation state; (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of winning data set to index values = 7 to 13 in the lottery table for the second preparation state; (e) is a lottery table for the RT state; is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of winning data set to index value=7 in . (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order in which the reels are stopped and the winning mode established when the lottery table for the first preparation state is selected; (b) the lottery table for the second preparation state; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the reel stop order and the established winning mode when is selected. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the transition to the RT state occurs in relation to the game section. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the lottery process for transition to the RT state is executed. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first table for normal conditions, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second table for normal conditions, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining tables for various conditions. (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a table for the RT state; (e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a table for the first BB state; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a corresponding process at the end of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing normal state processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing post-bonus state processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing first preparation state processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing second preparation state processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the information control processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for information performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing RT state processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the point value set for each combination and the set value when the lottery process for the combination is executed in the normal state; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the point value set for each combination and the set value when the lottery process is executed, and (c) when the lottery process for the combination is executed in the second BB state; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the point value set for each combination and the set value; It is a flowchart which shows the control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing RT state transition trigger processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) to (i) are time charts showing how lottery processing for transition to the RT state is executed in the normal state. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing BB processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for the first BB executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) to (i) are time charts for explaining the progress of the game when the first BB state occurs. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing second BB processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) to (i) are time charts for explaining the progress of the game when the second BB state occurs. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing advantageous section end processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) to (i) are time charts showing how the advantageous interval is forcibly ended in relation to the number of games continued in the advantageous interval. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the advantageous interval is forcibly terminated due to the occurrence of a shift to the RT state in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval is greater than or equal to the number of trigger games; be. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for illumination performed by main side MPU. (a), (b) It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the opening angle of a front door, and the control state of a device for lighting. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting device when the front door is open and the opening angle is equal to or less than the predetermined opening angle; (b) the opening angle of the front door is the predetermined opening angle; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting device when the maximum open angle exceeds the open angle; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining combinations of winning data and point values respectively set to index values=7 to 13 in the second preparation state in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels and the winning mode established when winning is achieved with index values=8 to 13 in the second preparation state; In the advantageous section, in the second preparation state, in which the conditions for transition to the RT state are satisfied, and in which the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is 30 games less than the number of trigger games or more. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the image display device notifies the order of stopping the reels when the index value=10 is won in a situation where the number of trigger games is less than the number of trigger games; It is a flowchart which shows the information control processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for information performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing second preparation state processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining a lottery table for normal conditions in a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing RT state transition trigger processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first table for normal conditions, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second table for normal conditions, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining tables for various conditions. (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a table for RT state. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing advantageous section end processing executed by the main MPU in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing RT state transition trigger processing executed by the main MPU in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing RT state transition trigger processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing advantageous section end processing executed by the main MPU in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a correspondence relationship between a combination of winning symbols and a privilege given when winning in the eighth embodiment; It is an explanatory view for explaining a lottery table for the normal state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the reel stop order and the established winning mode when a lottery table for normal state is selected; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of winning data set to index value = 9 in the lottery table for normal state, and (b) is set to index value = 9 in the lottery table for post-bonus state. (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of winning data set to index values = 9 to 15 in the lottery table for the first preparation state; (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of winning data set to index values = 9 to 15 in the lottery table for the second preparation state; (e) is a lottery table for the RT state; is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of winning data set to index value=9 in . It is a flowchart which shows the information control processing performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing advantageous section end processing executed by the main MPU; FIG.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine, which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. A plurality of wooden panels are fixed to the housing 11 so that the housing 11 is formed into a box-like shape that is open forward as a whole.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 as shown in FIGS. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with a shaft portion 12a provided on the left side of the front door 12 as a rotation axis. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the rear side thereof.

A game panel 20 is provided near the upper center portion of the front door 12 as shown in FIG. The game panel 20 has three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M and 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be viewed through the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and the reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that its center axis coincides with the rotation axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R one-to-one. there is Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected through the respective display windows 21L, 21M, 21R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20 as shown in FIG. When the start lever 41 is operated while game media such as medals and virtual medals are bet, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The respective stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively. Each of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44 is in a state in which it can be stopped after a predetermined time has passed since the left reel 32L started rotating.

The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44. One game (game cycle) is performed until the execution of various processes such as the granting of and the management of the game state is completed.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals as an investment value is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 when reception is permitted, and are guided to the hopper device 53 when reception is prohibited. The medals are led to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal discharge port 58 provided in the front lower portion of the front door 12 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a winning corresponding to the awarding of the game media is established on the activated line. there is

Below the medal slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided to be pushed when the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 52. As shown in FIG. Further, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, there is a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be betted at once, and two virtual medals are inserted at once. and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the checkout button 51 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 58 as real medals.

A power supply device 54 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 53 as shown in FIG. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 operated when the power is turned on and off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting state of the slot machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 1". A setting key insertion hole 57 is provided to be operated to change within the range of setting 6”.

Next, the symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 4 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has 20 symbols arranged in a row. Numbers "0" to "19" are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and these numbers are visible to the main controller 70 through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. It is a number for recognizing the symbol that is , and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (eg, 19th on the left reel 32L), a “watermelon” symbol (eg, 18th on the left reel 32L), a “cherry” symbol (eg, 17th on the left reel 32L), and “ Replay" symbol (for example, 16th on the left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (for example, 15th on the left reel 32L), "LUCKY" symbol (for example, 13th on the left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol ( For example, there are eight types of symbols, such as the 12th symbol on the left reel 32L) and the "White 7" symbol (eg, the 10th symbol on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 4, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIG. 5 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R. Each of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect positions where symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R. The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started with a specified number of game media bet, and when a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of giving the game media, Either the benefit of replay or the transition of the game state is provided.

That is, in the present slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which winning can be established. The main line ML is set as a straight line. Therefore, a subline SL1 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R. A subline SL3 connecting a connected subline SL2, a lower pattern of the left reel 32L, a lower pattern of the middle reel 32M, and a lower pattern of the right reel 32R, a lower pattern of the left reel 32L, a middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R. Winning is not established even if a winning combination is established on a straight line such as a sub-line SL4 connecting the upper symbols of .

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning.

Small wins for which game media are awarded include bell wins, watermelon wins, and cherry wins. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopped symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol. In that case, it will be a bell prize. When the bell wins, the number of game media to be given becomes “11”. Watermelon wins when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML. becomes. When the watermelon wins, the number of game media to be given becomes “7”. When the stopped symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "cherry" symbol, the cherry prize is won regardless of whether the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is. In the case of winning a cherry prize, the number of game media to be given becomes “2”.

Winnings that give a replay privilege that allows the next game to be played without betting a game medium include normal replay winnings, first promoted replay winnings, and second promoted replay winnings. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol. In that case, it will usually be a replay prize. On the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, or the main When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the line ML, the first promotion. Replay prize. On the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol, or the main When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol on the line ML, the second promotion. Replay prize.

If any of the above replay wins are made, a replay privilege is given that allows the player to play the next game without betting the game medium. Specifically, if any of the replay wins in the game in which "3" game media are betted, the betting of the game media is not required, and the next game is started with the "3" game media being betted. A game can be started.

Of the various replay prizes mentioned above, the first promotion replay prize and the second promotion replay prize not only serve as a trigger for granting the privilege of the replay prize, but also serve as a trigger for transitioning the game state. Specifically, when the first promotion replay winning is established in the first preparation state ST4, the gaming state is changed to the second preparation state ST5 in which the winning probability of the winning combination in which the replay prize can be established is higher than in the first preparation state ST4. Then, when the second promoted replay prize is established in the second preparation state ST5, the game state is shifted to the RT state ST6 in which the winning probability of the combination in which the replay prize can be established is higher than that in the second preparation state ST5. The contents of each game state will be described later.

State transition prizes in which only game state transitions are performed include first BB prizes, second BB prizes, and SB prizes. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Red 7" symbol. If it is a pattern, it becomes the first BB prize. On the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "White 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "White 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "White 7" symbol. , 2nd BB winner. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol of the left reel 32L is the "LUCKY" symbol, the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "BAR" symbol, and the stopped symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the SB wins. becomes.

When the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the BB state ST2. The BB state ST2 is a game state in which the expected number of game media to be awarded per unit number of games is higher than in game states other than the BB state ST2. Specifically, a winning combination that enables establishment of a bell prize is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1/1.5) than in other gaming states, and each reel 32L when the winning combination is won. , 32M and 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. The BB state ST2 continues over a plurality of games, and ends when an end condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event corresponding to the execution content of the game. The termination condition is arbitrary, but in the slot machine 10, the total number of game media given after the start of the BB state ST2 is equal to or greater than the termination reference number (for example, "350") is set as the termination condition. ing. As the BB state ST2, there are a first BB state to which a transition is made when a first BB prize is established and a second BB state to which a transition is made when a second BB prize is established. The difference between the first BB state and the second BB state will be explained later.

When the SB winning is established, the game state shifts to the SB state. The SB state is the normal state ST1 that stays when the RAM 74 of the main controller 70 is initialized, which will be described later, and although the degree of expectation for giving game media per unit number of games is the same, replay winning is established. This is a game state in which the probability is slightly higher than in the normal state ST1. Specifically, the probability of winning a replay prize in the normal state ST1 is approximately 1/7.3, whereas the probability of winning a replay prize in the SB state is approximately 1/7.1. That is, the SB state is a game state in which the player's advantage is substantially the same as in the normal state ST1. The SB state ends after one game. Although the details will be described later, the transition of the game section or the game state occurs when the SB combination is won or when the game shifts to the SB state.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

Above the front door 12, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, light emission of the upper lamp 61 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and light emission is controlled in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light emission effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair of left and right speakers, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the sound output is controlled so that a sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and a sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that Further, the speaker 62 is controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is controlled to display on the display surface images corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game.

On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of stored virtual medals, and a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of virtual medals to be awarded when a small winning combination is won. A dual-use display unit 66 that displays the number of game media and, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, performs display corresponding to the content of the notification, and a game interval is an advantageous interval. An advantageous section display section 67 is provided in which a display corresponding to is performed. The credit display section 65 is composed of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a monochromatic LED such as green.

FIG. 7A is a front view of a common display area 68 provided with a combined display section 66 and an advantageous section display section 67. FIG. In the common display area 68, as shown in FIG. 7(a), two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are arranged side by side in a dual-use display section 66, and one light-emitting section Advantageous section display section 67 is aggregated.

If any of the small wins (bell wins, watermelon wins, or cherry wins) corresponding to the provision of game media is established, the game media corresponding to the small win wins at the end of the game in which the small win wins were established. is displayed on the combined display section 66 . Specifically, when a bell win is established, "1" is displayed on each of the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b, thereby providing the game medium of "11". is notified. Further, when a watermelon win is established, the left 7-segment display 66a is not displayed, and '7' is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b, thereby providing the game medium of '7'. is notified. Further, when a cherry win is established, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden, and '2' is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b, thereby providing the game medium of '2'. is notified. On the other hand, even if a winning such as one of replay winning, one of BB winning and SB winning, which does not give a game medium is established, the dual-use display unit 66 does not display the display corresponding to the winning. During this period, the 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in a non-display state. The display of the number of given game media on the dual-use display unit 66 is ended when the game media are betted to start the next game after the game in which the display is performed, and each 7-segment display is displayed at this bet timing. The devices 66a and 66b are in a non-display state.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported on the image display device 63, information corresponding to the reported stop order is displayed on the combined display section 66. FIG. FIG. 7(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the dual-use display section 66. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7B, in the slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order indicated by the image display device 63. The first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop is the middle reel. 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop. is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is The stop order is the left reel 32L, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop. There is a stop sequence where the second stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the left reel 32L.

The notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 can be executed when the winning combination including the first promotion replay winning data or the winning combination including the second promotion replay winning data is won in the winning lottery process. Specifically, when a winning combination including the first promotion replay winning data is won, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above-described stopping orders, and the first promotion is performed. A replay prize is established. Then, when the first promoted replay prize is established, the game state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5 which is more advantageous for the player than the first preparation state ST4. In addition, when a winning combination including the second promotion replay winning data is won, the second promotion replay winning prize is awarded when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the winning combination of this time among the above-mentioned stopping orders. To establish. Then, when the second promotion replay winning is established, the game state is shifted from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6 which is more advantageous for the player than the second preparation state ST5.

When any one of the stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a of the dual-use display unit 66 is maintained in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b is maintained. , a display corresponding to the stop order of the notification targets is performed. The contents of this display are as shown in FIG. 7(b), and the display contents of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 are set in one-to-one correspondence with the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of display contents on the dual-purpose display unit 66 are set so as to correspond to part or all of the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63. good too.

The display contents of the stop order on the dual-purpose display section 66 are different from the display contents to be displayed when the dual-purpose display section 66 displays a display corresponding to the provision of game media. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the dual-use display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media provided or to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the content of notification of the order of stopping on the image display device 63 and the content of display of the order of stopping on the dual-purpose display section 66. FIG.

When the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and image display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in each of the unit display images G1 to G3. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8(a) shows how the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The left unit display image G1 displays an image "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, and the middle unit display image G2 displays an image "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M. , an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image G3.

While the image display device 63 displays an image notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, the combined display unit 66 displays the reels as shown in FIG. 8(b). An "L" is displayed corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R. That is, in the image display device 63, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed in the stopping order. While the corresponding image display is performed, the combined display section 66 performs display irrelevant to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the display contents on the image display device 63 even if the display corresponding to the notification contents of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed on the combined display section 66 .

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63 . Also from this point, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66 compared to the image display device 63 . In addition, the dual-purpose display section 66 is located on the side opposite to the image display device 63 with the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible. As a result, the combined display section 66 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the image display device 63 , and this also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display section 66 .

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63 are displayed. This display is started after the winning lottery process is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is validated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started earlier than the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63. However, these displays may start at the same time or substantially at the same time, and the display start order may be reversed. The display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a stop command for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which the display is executed. is terminated when

The combined display section 66 is arranged on the central side of the common display area 68 , whereas the advantageous section display section 67 is arranged on the corner side of the common display area 68 . The advantageous section display portion 67 is a display section for notifying that the game section is the advantageous section among the normal section and the advantageous section. The advantageous section is a stoppage of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables establishment of a winning advantageous to the player when a winning combination to be established is different according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The section corresponds to either the section in which the order is reported or the section in which the probability of transition to the RT state ST6, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is higher than in the normal section. On the other hand, the normal section refers to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable establishment of winnings that are advantageous to the player when different winning combinations are won according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. is not reported, and the probability of transition to the RT state ST6, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is lower than in the advantageous section. As will be described later in detail, the slot machine 10 has a normal state ST1, a BB state ST2, a post-bonus state ST3, a first preparation state ST4, a second preparation state ST5, and an RT state ST6 as game states. Existing. Each of these game states can stay in the normal section and can stay in the advantageous section. In any game state, the progress of the game differs depending on whether the game section stays in the normal section or the advantageous section.

When the transition condition to the advantageous section is established in the normal section and the transition to the advantageous section is made, the advantageous section display unit 67 is turned on to start notification of the advantageous section. Further, when the transition condition to the normal section is satisfied in the advantageous section and the transition to the normal section is made, the advantageous section display section 67 is turned off, thereby ending the notification of the advantageous section. As a result, it becomes possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the section is advantageous. Further, the dual-purpose display section 66, which is collectively provided in the common display area 68, is turned on when a game medium is given and turned off when the next game is started, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are turned on. is displayed on the image display device 63, and is turned off at the end of the game. Therefore, in a configuration in which the advantageous section display section 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 to prevent the player from becoming too conspicuous, the advantageous section display section 67 is displayed in the common display area 68 in the situation of the advantageous section. It is possible to positively create a situation in which only 67 is in a lighting state, so that the manager of the game hall can easily check the advantageous section display portion 67 . Instead of maintaining the lighting state of the advantageous interval display unit 67 during the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval display unit 67 may blink at a predetermined cycle during the advantageous interval. Further, as the combined display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67, other displays such as a liquid crystal display device may be used.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, a main controller 70 is provided above the reel unit 31 . The main controller 70 is attached to a back plate 11 b that forms the rear portion of the housing 11 . The main controller 70 is constructed by housing a main control board 71 in a board box 81 .

An MPU 72 is mounted on the device mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 71, as shown in FIG. The board box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 accommodated in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81 . Although the board box 81 is formed colorless and transparent, it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 accommodated in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 in the board box 81 so that the facing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10 . Therefore, by opening the front door 12 toward the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11, it becomes possible to see the opposing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 and It is possible to see the MPU 72 through the opposing wall portion 82 .

The substrate box 81 is formed by assembling a plurality of case bodies back and forth, and these plurality of case bodies are provided with an adhesive to prevent the case bodies from separating and to leave a trace when the case bodies are separated. A coupling portion 83 is provided. A plurality of coupling portions 83 are arranged side by side on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped board box 81 . As a result, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the joints 83 in a state in which the separation of the case body is prevented by using the part of the joints 83, another joint 83 can be used after that. are connected, it is possible to prevent the separation of the case body again. In addition, when the case body is separated, the connecting portion 83 is destroyed and a trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body is being separated illegally by visually checking the connecting portion 83. Become. A sealing seal 84 is attached to a side of the substrate box 81 other than the side on which the coupling portions 83 are arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the sealing seal 84 is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the sealing seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated, it is possible to leave a trace of it.

In the main control device 70 having the above configuration, the main control board 71 is provided with a plurality of notification display devices 85 to 87 . Specifically, a first notification display device 85, a second notification display device 86, and a third notification display device 87 are provided. Each of the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 is a segment display device in which seven LED display segments are arranged. It may be a light emitter, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to third information display devices 85 to 87 is installed so that its display surface faces the same direction as the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces. As a result, the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 housed inside the board box 81 can be viewed from the outside of the board box 81 . Further, as already explained, the main controller 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 in the board box 81 so that the facing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10. Therefore, when the front door 12 is opened to the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11 to the front of the slot machine 10, the first to the second 3, it becomes possible to see the display devices 85 to 87 for notification. Using these first to third notification display devices 85 to 87, management results of the game history are notified. This will be explained in detail later.

Visual confirmation of the main controller 70 is performed by opening the front door 12 to the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 . The housing 11 is provided with lighting devices 88a and 88b in order to improve the visibility of the main control device 70 when the front door 12 is opened. The illumination devices 88a and 88b are provided on the rear surface of the left side plate 11c and the rear surface of the right side plate 11d of the housing 11 so as to form a left and right pair. The lighting devices 88 a and 88 b are equipped with high-intensity LEDs as light emitters, and are installed so that the light irradiation direction is the main controller 70 . The irradiation range IR of the light by the lighting devices 88 a and 88 b includes the range facing the MPU 72 on the facing wall portion 82 of the main controller 70 . This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the MPU 72 . Also, the irradiation range IR includes the range facing the first to third information display devices 85 to 87 on the facing wall portion 82 of the main controller 70 . This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the first to third notification display devices 85-87. Further, the irradiation range IR includes the range in which the joint portion 83 is provided and the range in which the sealing seal 84 is provided in the substrate box 81 of the main controller 70 . This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the joint portion 83 and the sealing seal 84 .

Light irradiation from the lighting devices 88 a and 88 b is performed according to the opening angle of the front door 12 with respect to the housing 11 , details of which will be described later. In order to detect the opening angle of the front door 12, an opening angle sensor 89 is provided on the rear surface of the front door 12 and at a position adjacent to the shaft portion 12a, as shown in FIG. An open angle sensor 89 can detect whether or not the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11, and when the front door 12 is open, the opening angle is a predetermined opening angle. It is possible to detect whether or not the The method of detecting the opening angle of the front door 12 by the opening angle sensor 89 is arbitrary. A detection part that releases the pressed state, and a detection part that enters the pressed state when the open angle of the front door 12 exceeds a predetermined open angle and does not enter the pressed state until the open angle of the front door 12 reaches the predetermined open angle. can be considered.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70 . The effect control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 on the front door 12 . The effect control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61 , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 based on commands received from the main control device 70 . Incidentally, the effect control device 90, like the main control device 70, has a control board housed in a board box.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main controller 70 as already described. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73. A RAM 74, a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 72 includes the reel unit 31, a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, and 44a that individually detect the operation of each of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44, and a medal insertion sensor. A inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the mouth 45; credit insertion detection sensors 47a, 48a, 49a for individually detecting the operation of each credit insertion button 47, 48, 49; A settlement detection sensor 51a, a payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, a reset detection sensor that detects the operation of a reset button 56 provided in the power supply device 54, and a setting key that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57. Various sensors such as a detection sensor and an opening angle sensor 89 are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72 .

On the output side of the MPU 72, the reel unit 31, the selector driving section 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the combined display section 66, the advantageous section display section 67, the first to third notification display devices 85 87, lighting devices 88a and 88b, and an effect control device 90 are connected. In each game, the MPU 72 controls the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reel unit 31. FIG. The selector 52 guides the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 to the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if reception is permitted, and to the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if reception is prohibited. It has a function of ejecting to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the The selector drive unit 52a has a function of switching the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. and a position for prohibiting reception. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state by switching the output state and the stop state of the driving signal to the selector driving section 52a.

Further, the MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are to be paid out. Further, the MPU 72 controls display of the combined display unit 66 so that the number of game media to be awarded is displayed when game media are awarded. In addition, the MPU 72 controls the display of the advantageous section display unit 67 so that the advantageous section is notified when it is an advantageous section. Further, the MPU 72 controls display of the notification display devices 85 to 87 so that a display corresponding to the game management result is performed. The MPU 72 also controls the lighting devices 88 a and 88 b based on the detection result of the opening angle sensor 89 . Further, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to the effect control device 90 for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the image display device 63. In this case, display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the performance control device 90 , while the direct display control of the combined display section 66 is performed by the MPU 72 . That is, for the image display device 63, which is subject to relatively complicated display control, direct display control is performed by the effect control device 90, and the combined display unit 66, which is subject to relatively simple display control. Direct display control is executed in the MPU 72 for . As a result, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes the improvement of attention to the performance and a display that emphasizes reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72 .

An input side of the MPU 72 is connected to a power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply 54 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. It monitors the voltage being applied, and outputs a power failure signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage is below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes a power failure process by receiving a power failure signal, and after the power is restored, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power failure. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power supply unit during power failure for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power during power failure when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied to the power supply unit during a power failure (for example, for one or two days). be done. However, the data stored in the RAM 74 is initialized by turning on the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 .

The performance control device 90 includes a performance control board 91 for controlling execution of various notifications and various performances. An MPU 92 is mounted on the effect control board 91 . The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A RAM 94 is built in, and a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are also built in.

Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips. In addition, the RAM 94 is not supplied with backup power from the power supply section of the power supply unit 54 when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, but the RAM 94 is supplied with backup power. good too.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 as already described, and receives various commands from the MPU 72 . An upper lamp 61 , a speaker 62 and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92 . Based on commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63, thereby performing various notifications and various effects. let it happen.

In addition to the MPU 92, the effect control board 91 also includes a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like, although not shown. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the image display device 63 . The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, reads image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing, and causes the image display device 63 to display the image data. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the image display device 63 . This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63 . When the MPU 92 determines the execution contents of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 stores a drawing list indicating the contents of the image corresponding to each update timing in the VDP according to the determined execution contents of the effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and uses the read image data to create display data in the video RAM. Then, the VDP outputs an image signal corresponding to the generated display data to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73 and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, main ROM 73 and main RAM 74 respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93 and RAM 94 of the effect control device 90 are respectively the effect side. They are referred to as an MPU 92, an effect-side ROM 93, and an effect-side RAM 94.

Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, first, an initialization process is executed (step S101). In the initialization processing, interrupts by the timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are made for the registers and I/O devices in the main MPU 72 . After the initialization process is finished, the display start process is executed (step S102). In the display start processing, the display on the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 is started. In this case, if the main side RAM 74 stores the information of the management result of the game history just before the last power failure, the first to third notification display devices 85 to 85 are arranged so that the display corresponding to the information is performed. 87 display control is executed. On the other hand, if the main-side RAM 74 does not store the information of the management result of the game history immediately before the previous power failure or if the regular information is not stored as the information, a predetermined initial display (for example, all lighting ) is performed, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 is executed. The processing for managing the game history and the contents displayed on the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 will be described later in detail.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the power is turned on (step S103). If the power is turned on with the setting key inserted (step S103: YES), if the reset button 56 is not turned on when the power is turned on (step S104: NO), the winning probability remains unchanged. A setting process is executed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is turned on when the power is turned on (step S104: YES), the winning probability setting process is executed (step S106) after executing the clear process (step S105).

In the clear processing, all areas in the main RAM 74 are initialized. In this case, the main side RAM 74 stores an area for storing the setting values of the slot machine 10, an area for storing data indicating whether or not the BB state ST2, and data indicating the total number of game media provided in the BB state ST2. an area storing data indicating the game state; an area storing data for specifying the conditions for ending the RT state ST6; an area storing data indicating a game interval; Each area of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0", including the area where the data is stored. As a result, when the clearing process is executed, the normal state ST1 is established regardless of the state before the power cutoff, and the normal section is entered. If it is in the regulated state, the abnormal state is cancelled.

In the winning probability setting process, the current set value is read and the current set value is displayed on the credit display section 65 on the condition that the setting key is inserted and turned on. When the clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, a display corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed on the credit display section 65 at the start of the winning probability setting process, and the clearing process (step S105) is performed. is not executed, a display corresponding to the setting value in the state before the power shutdown is performed. In the winning probability setting process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display section 65 . If the reset button 56 is operated while the setting value is "setting 6", the setting value is updated to "setting 1". When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the winning probability setting process is terminated. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display section 65 is ended.

After executing the winning probability setting process, the advantageous section initialization process is executed (step S107). In the advantageous section initialization processing, processing for initializing information relating to the advantageous section is executed. As a result, when the winning probability setting process is executed, the game section becomes the normal section without fail. The specific processing contents of the advantageous section initialization processing will be described later. After executing the initialization process of the advantageous section, the process shifts to the normal process (step S108). The normal processing will be explained later in detail.

If the ON operation of the setting key has not been performed in the main process (step S103: NO), the power recovery process from step S109 onwards is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power shutdown. In the power restoration process, it is determined whether or not the setting values of the slot machine 10 are normal by checking the main RAM 74 (step S109). Specifically, if the setting value is any one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is checked whether the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S110). A power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to "1". will be set. If the power failure flag is set to "1", it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S111). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to confirm whether the value is normal.

If affirmative determination is made in all of steps S109 to S111, it means that the power failure processing at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, by writing the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 74 to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 and returning the data saved in the main RAM 74 to the register of the main MPU 72, the register of the main MPU 72 The state is returned to the state before the power was cut off (step S112). Also, the power failure flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S113). After that, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the effect side MPU 92 (step S114), it returns to the address before the power shutdown (step S115).

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in any of steps S109 to S111, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S116), and all the output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0", thereby all actuators connected to the output ports are cleared. is turned off (step S117), and error notification processing is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S118). Then it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the clear process (step S105).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 msec.

In the register saving process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. FIG. In step S202, it is checked whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1", and if the power failure flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203 to execute power failure processing.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply 54 is input to the main MPU 72 . In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74 . After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, and subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power failure flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S205, the main MPU 72 performs an interrupt termination declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S206, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors provided for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In step S207, sensor monitoring processing is performed to read the states of various sensors connected to the input port and to monitor whether the read results are normal.

In step S208, a timer calculation process is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S209, counter processing for outputting the result of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts to the outside is performed. In step S210, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the MPU 92 on the production side is performed. In step S211, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S212, the values of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are returned to the corresponding registers in the main MPU 72, respectively. In step S213, a management process is executed for managing the game history and displaying the contents corresponding to the management result on the first to third notification display devices 85-87. In step S214, lighting processing for controlling light emission of the lighting devices 88a and 88b in accordance with the opening angle of the front door 12 is executed. After that, in step S215, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated. Details of the management processing in step S213 and the lighting processing in step S214 will be described later.

Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S301). After that, start waiting processing is executed (step S302). In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has occurred in the previous game. If any replay winning has occurred, a replay process of setting the same number of bets as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. When no replay win has occurred, it is determined whether or not a settlement button 51 has been operated, and when the settlement button 51 has been operated, the same number of medals as credited virtual medals are paid out. Perform medal return processing. After completion of the medal return process or when the settlement button 51 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if both the insertion of medals and the operation of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 are not performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After execution of the start waiting process in step S302, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number ("3" in this embodiment) (step S303), and if the number of bets has not reached the specified number Then, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S302). If the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S302). On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, after the main line ML is activated, reception prohibition processing is executed (step S305). By executing the reception prohibiting process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a. After that, a winning lottery process for drawing a winning combination in the current game is executed (step S306), and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are driven and controlled in a manner corresponding to the results of the winning combination lottery process. (step S307).

After that, medium application processing is executed (step S308). In the medium awarding process, when a minor winning combination has been established in the current game, a process for awarding the player with a number of game media corresponding to the winning of the minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, when virtual medals are awarded, a value corresponding to the current minor winning combination is added to a credit counter provided in the main RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter reaches the maximum number of stored coins, drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit stored number is paid out to the medal receiving tray 59 . In addition, in the medium provision process, display control is performed on the combined display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the number of game media to be provided this time is performed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the combined display section 66 is continued until a new bet of game media is made.

After that, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state and the game section corresponding to the result of the current game (step S309). Also, an external output setting process for outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the gaming hall is executed (step S310). Then, reception permission processing is executed (step S311). By executing the acceptance permission process, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

The winning lottery process executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, a random number used for judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained (step S401). In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 74. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, a lottery table for judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is read out from data for specific control, which will be described later, in the main ROM 73 (step S402). Here, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance. , it is possible to set which winning probability the lottery process for the winning combination is to be executed based on. "Setting n+1" is more advantageous winning probability for the player than "Setting n". Specifically, the winning probability of the role that triggers the transition to the BB state ST2 is higher in "setting n+1" than in "setting n", so that "setting n+1" is better than "setting n". beneficial to those who Also, even if the set values are at the same stage, the lottery table to be referred to differs depending on the game state. In step S402, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value and the current gaming state is selected.

A lottery table corresponding to each of the normal state ST1 and the BB state ST2 (the first BB state or the second BB state) will be described by taking the case of "setting 3" as an example. First, the lottery table selected in the normal state ST1 will be described. FIG. 14(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), index values IV are set in the lottery table for the normal state, and winning data and point values PV are set in each index value IV. there is The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value ("65535") of the free run counter.

Specifically, bell winning data is set to the index value IV=1. If winning is achieved with index value IV=1, bell prize winning is established without fail regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timings of the respective stop buttons 42-44 relative to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. do.

In the present slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled so that the reels 32L, 32M and 32R can slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. In other words, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to be stopped within a specified time (190 msec) after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to facilitate establishment of a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and to avoid establishment of a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, only one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R constitutes a combination of symbols for winning a prize. If there are 5 or more symbols between the constituent symbols, depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML (this phenomenon is also known as "dropout"). say). The bell winning is a winning mode in which no dropouts occur. In addition, in the normal replay winning prize, the first promotion replay winning prize, and the second promotion replay winning prize, failure occurs regardless of the timing of operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 relative to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is a winning mode that does not. On the other hand, watermelon winning, cherry winning, 1BB winning, 2BB winning and SB winning are winning modes in which a failure can occur depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 relative to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

Watermelon winning data is set to index value IV=2. If a win is made with the index value IV=2, the watermelon prize can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the watermelon prize will not be established.

Cherry winning data is set to the index value IV=3. If a win is made with the index value IV=3, a cherry win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that the cherry winning will not be established.

The 1st BB winning data is set to the index value IV=4. If a win is made with the index value IV=4, the first BB win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first BB winning will not be established. Second BB winning data is set to index value IV=5. If a win is made with the index value IV=5, the second BB win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44, there is a possibility that the 2nd BB winning will not be established. SB winning data is set to index value IV=6. When winning is achieved with index value IV=6, SB winning can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the SB prize will not be established.

Here, the winning data other than the 1st BB winning data and the 2nd BB winning data, such as the watermelon winning data and the SB winning data, are deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the winning is established. It is not carried over to the game after the game that has become. On the other hand, the 1st BB winning data and the 2nd BB winning data are the corresponding BB data even in the game after the winning game, except when the main side RAM 74 is cleared (step S105). It is stored and held until winning is established. In this case, in a game in which the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first BB winning data, the second BB winning data and the SB winning data is excluded from the lottery. Thus, it is possible to prevent the BB winning data and the SB winning data from being newly stored even though the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data are already stored. It is possible to prevent SB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

The normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV=7. When winning with the index value IV=7, normal replay winning is ensured regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44 relative to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. To establish.

When the lottery table for the normal state is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=1 is about 1/7, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=2 is about 1/77. , the probability of winning when the index value IV=3 is about 1/423, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=4 and the probability of winning when the index value IV=5 are: They are about 1/218 respectively, the probability of winning when the index value IV=6 is 1/16, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=7 is about 1/7.3.

Next, a lottery table to be selected in the case of the first BB state or in the case of the "setting 3" and the second BB state will be described. FIG. 14(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the BB state.

In the lottery table for the BB state, as shown in FIG. 14(b), bell winning data is set for the index value IV=1 in the same way as in the lottery table for the normal state. However, the point value PV set to the index value IV=1 is "44000", which is a larger value than in the case of the lottery table for the normal state. In this case, the probability of winning with index value IV=1 is approximately 1/1.5. Then, if a win is made with the index value IV=1, the bell prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. Further, the number of game media given when the bell win is established is larger than the number of game media given when other minor wins are established. As a result, it is possible to increase the expected number of game media to be awarded per unit number of games in the BB state ST2 than in the normal state ST1.

The winning data set to the index values IV=2 and 3 and the point value PV set to each index value IV are the same as the index values IV=2 and 3 in the lottery table for the normal state. there is In addition, normal replay winning data is set to index value IV=4. The point value PV set to the index value IV=4 is larger than the point value PV set to the index value IV=7 in which normal replay winning data is set in the lottery table for the normal state. It is a certain "20530". In this case, the probability of winning with index value IV=4 is about 1/3.2. As a result, in the BB state ST2, even if none of the small wins is won, the normal replay winning is established. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of game media that the player obtains in the BB state ST2.

Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 13), after selecting the lottery table (step S402), the index value IV is set to "1" (step S403), and the judgment value DV used when judging the winning combination is set. (Step S404). In this determination value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current determination value DV to set a new determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S401 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV "1" and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value. A new judgment value DV is set.

After that, the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is determined (step S405). Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds "65535" is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds "65535", the winning data obtaining process is executed to set the data of the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main side RAM 74 (step S406). In the winning data acquisition process, all the winning data set for the current index value IV in the lottery table to be referred to are set in the main RAM 74 . In the state where the winning data is set, if the winning data is winning data other than the BB winning data, regardless of whether or not the winning corresponding to the winning data is established, "0" is cleared after the end of the current game, and the BB is set. If it is winning data, it is cleared to "0" when winning is established.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S405: NO), it means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In this case, 1 is added to the index value IV (step S407), and it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined (step S408). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a judgment target to be judged, the process returns to step S404 to continue judging the winning combination. At this time, in step S404, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S405, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

If the process of step S406 has been executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S408, this means that the determination of whether the winning combination has been completed has been completed. In this case, after the first stop information setting process for setting stop information for reel stop control is executed (step S409), the effect content determination process is executed (step S410). In the effect content determination processing, a process for determining the general content of the effect to be executed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 in the current game is executed. As the content of the outline, high-expectation-level content, medium-expectation-level content, and low-expectation-level content are set so that the degree of expectation for the occurrence of BB state ST2 or RT state ST6 is gradually lowered. In the determination processing of the content of the performance, the outline of the content of the performance is decided by lottery using a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current game state, the current game section and the result of the lottery processing of the combination.

The game start command is set to information corresponding to the general content determined in the effect content determination process, and the game start command is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 92 (step S411). The game start command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started, and is for making the production side MPU 92 recognize the general content of the production decided by the main side MPU 72. It is a command, and is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 in the command output process (step S210) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

When receiving a game start command, the effect-side MPU 92 grasps the general content of the effect in the current game from the game start command, and determines the details of the effect in a manner corresponding to the grasped general content of the effect. It is decided by lottery. Then, the data table corresponding to the content of the determined performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 are performed according to the read data table. Execute control.

After that, a notification control process is executed (step S412). In the notification control process, although the details will be described later, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is to be notified, display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the stop order to be notified is performed. Along with execution, processing is executed so that the notification of the stop order to be notified is executed by the image display device 63 . After that, the RT state ST6 shift trigger process is executed (step S413). In the transition triggering process for the RT state ST6, although the details will be described later, a process for generating a trigger for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S307 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed (step S501). In the rotation start process, a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in the previous game started. If the wait time has not passed, wait until the wait time has passed. When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main side RAM 74 . By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing of step S206 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R reaches a constant speed, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Players and the like are notified of this.

After that, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S502). If none of the stop buttons 42-44 has been operated, the process of step S502 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42-44 is operated. When it is determined that any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R have been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. (step S503). If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S502, and the process of step S502 is repeatedly executed until any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set (step S504). The stop instruction command is a command for making the effect-side MPU 92 recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S505 to S511 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower row) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S505). Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. After that, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S506).

In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are slid by one symbol and then stopped, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being slid by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being slid by three symbols, and four symbols. There are 5 patterns of stop modes, including a stop mode of stopping after sliding. Therefore, in step S506, any value from "0" to "4" is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM74.

After that, the calculated sliding number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position (step S507). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal (step S508), and if they are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R A reel stop process for stopping the rotation of is performed (step S509). After that, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S510). If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed (step S511), and the process returns to step S502.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). , it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") with respect to the arrival symbol that has reached the base position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to stop. As the stop information, slip number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the slip number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sliding number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. .

As the processing for setting the stop information, the first stop information setting processing executed in step S409 of the combination lottery processing (FIG. 13) and the step S511 of the reel control processing (FIG. 15) are executed. There is a stop information second setting process. In the first stop information setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process for the combination. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process is changed after the reel is stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, and the stop numbers of the stopped reels 32L, 32M and 32R. do.

When it is determined in step S510 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, a prize determination process is executed in step S512. In the winning determination process, the types of symbols stopped on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are grasped. Then, if the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process for the current combination, the winning combination is selected. Winning correspondence processing is executed as the establishment of winning. In the winning handling process, the number of medals to be paid out is set in the main side RAM 74 so that the game media can be awarded in the medium awarding process if the winning is a minor win. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (step S302) so that the replay setting process is executed.

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is set as an object to be output to the effect side MPU 92 (step S513). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the current winning has been established, and, if the winning has been established, data indicating the type of the winning.

<About game status and game section>
Next, the game state and game section will be described. 16A and 16B are explanatory diagrams for explaining game states existing in the slot machine 10. FIG.

As already explained as game states, there are the normal state ST1, the BB state ST2, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6. The normal state ST1 is a gaming state in which the main side RAM 74 is cleared by executing the processing (step S105). Also, in the first preparation state ST4, if the winning combination including the first promotion replay winning data is won in the combination lottery process, but the first promotion replay prize is not established, and in the second preparation state ST5 When the winning of the second promotion replay is not established in spite of the fact that the winning combination including the winning data of the second promotion replay is won in the winning lottery process, the game state becomes the normal state ST1. The normal state ST1 is a game state with the lowest advantage compared to the other game states ST2 to ST6.

The normal state ST1 is a game state that is continued until the game for the normal side upper limit number of games (specifically, 999 games) is played unless a BB prize is established on the way. In the normal state ST1, when the games for the normal side upper limit number of games are played, the game shifts to the first preparation state ST4. Further, although the details will be described later, in the normal state ST1, both the normal section and the advantageous section can be set as the game section. However, in the normal state ST1, the frequency of staying in the normal section is higher than in the advantageous section.

The BB state ST2 is a game state that shifts when the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established in any of the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5 and the RT state ST6. be. As already described, the BB state ST2 is a game state in which the expected number of game media to be awarded per unit game number is higher than the game states ST1, ST3 to ST6 other than the BB state ST2. Specifically, a winning combination that enables establishment of a bell prize is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1/1.5) than in other gaming states, and each reel 32L if the winning combination is won. , 32M and 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. In addition, in the BB state ST2, if a small winning combination is not won, a normal replay winning is established. The BB state ST2 ends when the total number of game media given since the start of the BB state ST2 becomes equal to or greater than the end reference number (for example, "350").

The BB state ST2 includes a first BB state and a second BB state. The first BB state is the BB state ST2 to which the first BB winning is established, and the second BB state is the BB state ST2 to which the second BB winning is established. The BB state ST2 ends when the total number of game media given since the start of the BB state ST2 becomes equal to or greater than the end reference number (for example, "350"). In this case, the end reference number is set to a number larger than the maximum number of game media that can be awarded in one game, so the BB state ST2 continues over a plurality of games. Also, the end reference number is the same in both the first BB state and the second BB state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first BB state and the second BB state may have substantially the same termination reference number although they differ, and the first BB state and the second BB state may have significantly different termination reference numbers. may be configured. Further, the first BB state may have more termination criteria than the second BB state, and the second BB state may have more termination criteria than the first BB state.

The first BB state and the second BB state have the same expected number of game media to be provided in the BB state ST2, but differ in the setting mode of the game section. Specifically, in the first BB state, as long as the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval does not reach the maximum number of games midway through, the advantageous interval is maintained regardless of the game interval before the start of the first BB state. Even after the end of the 1BB state, it is maintained in the advantageous section. For example, when the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the game section is set to the advantageous section in the first game in the first BB state, the advantageous section is maintained throughout the first BB state, and the first BB state is maintained. The advantageous section is maintained even after the end. Further, when the first BB winning is established in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is maintained even in the first BB state, and the advantageous section is maintained even after the first BB state ends.

On the other hand, in the second BB state, unless the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games midway through, the game section before the start of the second BB state is taken over as it is, and the game section remains as it is after the second BB state ends. is taken over. For example, when the second BB prize is established in the normal section, the normal section is maintained throughout the second BB state, and the normal section is maintained even after the second BB state ends. In addition, when the 2nd BB prize is established in the advantageous section, unless the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games on the way, the advantageous section is maintained throughout the 2nd BB state, and the 2nd BB state ends. The advantageous section is maintained after that.

Although the details will be described later, in the first BB state shifted in the normal section, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed in the first game. Further, when the condition for transition to RT state ST6 is not established, lottery processing for transition to RT state ST6 is executed based on the result of lottery processing (FIG. 13) for the combination in games after the first game in the first BB state. be done. Further, when the conditions for transition to RT state ST6 are established, whether the continuation rate of RT state ST6 is increased based on the results of the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in games subsequent to the first game in the first BB state. A lottery process is executed to determine whether or not. On the other hand, in the second BB state, the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 and the promotion lottery for the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 regardless of whether or not the game section and the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 are satisfied before the start of the second BB state. None of the processing is performed.

The probability that the first BB winning data is set in the winning lottery process is the same regardless of whether the set value of the slot machine 10 is "setting 1" to "setting 6", whereas the second BB winning data The probability of being set in the lottery process for the winning combination differs depending on the set value of the slot machine 10 . In this case, as described above, in the first BB state, the lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 and the promotion lottery process for the continuation rate of RT state ST6 are executed, while in the second BB state, these transition lottery process and promotion lottery process are executed. By preventing the lottery process from being executed, the probability of transition to the RT state ST6 triggered by the occurrence of the BB state ST2 and the probability of staying in the RT state ST6 are common among the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". It becomes possible to

When the BB state ST2 is terminated, regardless of whether the terminated BB state ST2 is the first BB state or the second BB state, and whether the game section is the normal section or the advantageous section, the post-bonus state ST3 is established. Become. Further, when the SB winning is established in either the first preparation state ST4 or the second preparation state ST5, the post-bonus state ST3 is entered.

The post-bonus state ST3 is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay prize is higher than in the normal state ST1. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17(a) and 17(b), in either the normal state ST1 or the post-bonus state ST3, the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV=7 in the lottery table. is set, the point value PV assigned to the index value IV=7 is "8978" in the normal state ST1 as shown in FIG. is "9500" as shown in FIG. 17(b). Also, the types of winning data set to index values IV=1 to 6 and the point values PV assigned to these index values IV=1 to 6 are the same in the normal state ST1 and the post-bonus state ST3. It's becoming As a result, the post-bonus state ST3 becomes a gaming state slightly more advantageous than the normal state ST1 with respect to the winning lottery process. Further, in the post-bonus state ST3, both the normal section and the advantageous section can be set as the game section.

In the post-bonus state ST3, if the winning index value IV=6 where the SB winning data is set in the role lottery process (FIG. 13) and the SB winning is not established in the game, the game section is the normal section. and the advantageous section, the first preparation state ST4 is entered. On the other hand, in the post-bonus state ST3, when the index value IV=6 is won and the SB prize is established in the game, the transition to the first preparation state ST4 does not occur, and the state stays in the post-bonus state ST3. It will happen.

The first preparation state ST4 is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay prize is the same as in the post-bonus state ST3. Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 17(b) and 17(c), in either the post-bonus state ST3 or the first preparation state ST4, the normal replay is performed with the index value IV=7 in the lottery table. Winning data is set. Also, index values IV=8 to 13 are set in the lottery table in the first preparation state ST4, and both normal replay winning data and first promotion replay winning data are set for each of these index values IV=8 to 13. is set. In the post-bonus state ST3, the point value PV assigned to the index value IV=7 is "9500" as shown in FIG. The total value of the point values PV set to 7 to 13 is "9500" as shown in FIG. 17(c). Also, the types of winning data set to index values IV=1 to 6 and the point values PV assigned to these index values IV=1 to 6 are different in the post-bonus state ST3 and the first preparation state ST4. are identical. As a result, the first preparation state ST4 has the same advantage with respect to the winning lottery process as the post-bonus state ST3.

FIG. 18(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the winning mode established when winning is won with index values IV=8 to 13 in the first preparation state ST4. is. If the lottery is won with the index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. When the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop (the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the stop command is issued second) is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop (the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the stop command is issued last) is the right reel 32R. A first promoted replay prize is established without fail regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, a normal replay prize is established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Also, with index values IV=9 to 13, as shown in FIG. Different from the value IV=8 and different from each other. As a result, even if the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the role in the first preparation state ST4 wins with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13, the stop order corresponding to the establishment of the first promotion replay win The first promotion replay winning prize is not established unless the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. Also, in the first preparation state ST4, both the normal section and the advantageous section can be set as the game section.

The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first promotion replay prize is the lottery of the first preparation state ST4 in the advantageous section and in the situation where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. When the winner is selected with any of the index values IV=8 to 13 in the table, the image display device 63 and the dual-use display unit 66 notify the winner. This notification is made after the start of the game in which the notification is executed and until the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ends and the constant speed period starts and the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is activated. is started at

If the first promotion replay winning prize is not established in the case where any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the lottery table of the first preparation state ST4 is won, the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are established. Regardless of whether or not the game is in progress, and regardless of the game section, the process shifts to the normal state ST1. In this case, since the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed, the game section in the transition destination normal state ST1 becomes the normal section regardless of the current game section, and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is established. If so, it is invalidated and the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are not met. If the first promotion replay winning prize is established in the case where any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the lottery table of the first preparation state ST4 is won, whether the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are satisfied Regardless of whether or not, and regardless of the game section, the transition to the second preparation state ST5 is made.

The second preparation state ST5 is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay prize is higher than in the first preparation state ST4. Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 17(c), in the lottery table in the first preparation state ST4, normal replay winning data is set to index value IV=7, and index values IV=8 to 13 are set. While both the normal replay winning data and the first promotion replay winning data are set, the index value IV=7 in the lottery table in the second preparation state ST5 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 17(d). Normal replay winning data is set, and both normal replay winning data and second promotion replay winning data are set to index values IV=8-13. In the first preparation state ST4, the total value of the point values PV set to the index values IV=7 to 13 is "9500" as shown in FIG. The total value of the point values PV set to index values IV=7 to 13 in ST5 is "43500" as shown in FIG. 17(d). Also, the types of winning data set to index values IV=1 to 6 and the point values PV assigned to these index values IV=1 to 6 are divided into a first preparation state ST4 and a second preparation state ST5. are the same. As a result, the second preparatory state ST5 becomes a gaming state more advantageous than the first preparatory state ST4 with respect to the lottery process for the winning combination.

FIG. 18(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the winning mode established when winning is won with index values IV=8 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5. is. When winning with index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. 18(b), the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. In some cases, the second promoted replay winning is established without fail regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. . Further, when the index value IV is 9 to 13, as shown in FIG. It differs from the index value IV=8 and differs from each other. As a result, even if the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the role in the second preparation state ST5 wins with any of the index values IV=8 to 13, the stop order corresponding to the establishment of the second promotion replay prize is achieved. The second promotion replay winning prize is not established unless the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. Also, in the second preparation state ST5, both the normal section and the advantageous section can be set as the game section.

The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay prize is the lottery of the second preparation state ST5 in the advantageous section and in the situation where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. When the winner is selected with any of the index values IV=8 to 13 in the table, the image display device 63 and the dual-use display unit 66 notify the winner. This notification is made after the start of the game in which the notification is executed and until the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ends and the constant speed period starts and the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is activated. is started at

In the case where a winning is made with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the lottery table in the second preparation state ST5, and the second promotion replay prize is not established, the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are established. Regardless of whether or not the game is in progress, and regardless of the game section, the process shifts to the normal state ST1. In this case, since the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed, the game section in the transition destination normal state ST1 becomes the normal section regardless of the current game section, and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is established. If so, it is invalidated and the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are not met. In the event that a prize is won with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the lottery table of the second preparation state ST5 and the second promotion replay prize is established, whether the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are established. Regardless of whether it is or not, and regardless of the game section, the process shifts to RT state ST6.

The RT state ST6 is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay prize is higher than in the second preparation state ST5. Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 17(d), in the lottery table in the second preparation state ST5, normal replay winning data is set to index value IV=7 and index values IV=8 to 13 are set. Both the normal replay winning data and the second promotion replay winning data are set. Winning data is set. In the second preparation state ST5, the total value of the point values PV set to the index values IV=7 to 13 is "43500" as shown in FIG. The point value PV set to the index value IV=7 is "48500" as shown in FIG. 17(e). Also, the types of winning data set to index values IV=1 to 6 and the point values PV assigned to these index values IV=1 to 6 are the same in the second preparation state ST5 and the RT state ST6. It has become. As a result, the RT state ST6 becomes a game state more advantageous than the second preparation state ST5 with respect to the lottery process for the winning combination.

The RT state ST6 is a game state that continues until the RT side upper limit number of games (specifically, 30 games) is played unless a BB prize is established on the way. Further, although the details will be described later, both the normal section and the advantageous section can be set as the game section in the RT state ST6. However, in the RT state ST6, the frequency of staying in the advantageous section is higher than that in the normal section.

When the RT-side upper limit number of games have been played in the RT state ST6, the state shifts to the first preparation state ST4. Further, when the RT state ST6 ends, the continuation lottery process is executed according to the continuation rate set at that time. In the case where the continuation lottery process results in a continuation lottery, the game moves to the first preparation state ST4 in an advantageous section in which the conditions for moving to the RT state ST6 are satisfied. In the case of shifting to the first preparation state ST4 in this situation, if the lottery table in the first preparation state ST4 wins with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13, it is possible to establish the first promoted replay prize. The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped according to the stop order and the first promotion replay winning is established, the second preparation state ST5 is entered. Even in the second preparation state ST5, it is an advantageous section and the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are met. Therefore, if a winning is made with any of the index values IV=8 to 13 in the lottery table in the second preparation state ST5, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second promotion replay winning prize is be notified. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped according to the stop order and the second promotion replay winning is established, the RT state ST6 is reached. In other words, even if the RT state ST6 ends, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped according to the notified stop order by continuing winning in the continuous lottery process executed at the end of the RT state ST6 again. will return.

On the other hand, in the case of a loss in the continuation lottery process, the state shifts to the first preparation state ST4 in a state where the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are not satisfied. In this case, as long as the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are not newly established, even if the index value IV = 8 to 13 in the lottery table of the first preparation state ST4 is won, the first promotion replay prize is established. The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables Then, if the first promotion replay prize cannot be established even though the winner is won with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13, the advantageous section initialization process is executed as already described. As a result, the vehicle is in the normal state ST1, which is the normal section.

Here, as described above, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first promotion replay prize in the first preparation state ST4 is notified, and establishment of the second promotion replay prize in the second preparation state ST5 is possible. Notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R occurs in the advantageous section and when the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 are satisfied, but even if the notification is not performed, the game is played. Since the actual stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the player becomes the stopping order corresponding to the correct answer, the first promotion replay winning is established in the first preparation state ST4, and the first promotion replay prize is established in the second preparation state ST5. 2 promotion replay prize is established. Then, even if it is the normal section or the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied, if the second promotion replay winning prize is established, the state is shifted to the RT state ST6. Even if the RT state ST6 is shifted in such a situation, it is treated as the same as the RT state ST6 that is shifted in the advantageous section and the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are satisfied. Further, when the game is shifted to the RT state ST6 under such a situation, the game section becomes an advantageous section in the RT state ST6, and the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is determined at the time of the transition.

In the first preparation state ST4, if any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 is won in a situation where the conditions for transition to the normal section or RT state ST6 are not satisfied, it is possible to establish the first promotion replay prize. Although the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is not notified, the image display device 63 executes an effect that enables the player to recognize that the winning combination has been won. In addition, if any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 is won in the second preparation state ST5 in a situation where the conditions for transition to the normal section or the RT state ST6 are not satisfied, the establishment of the second promotion replay prize is established. Although the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R to be enabled is not notified, the image display device 63 executes an effect that enables the player to recognize that the winning combination has been won. The player who confirms this effect performs the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R while expecting the stop order corresponding to the correct answer. Then, when the transition to the RT state ST6 finally occurs, the feeling of gaining the benefit of the transition to the RT state ST6 by oneself is strengthened, and a sense of satisfaction is obtained. Furthermore, even in the RT state ST6, it becomes an advantageous section and the continuation rate is determined at the time of transition, so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the same as the RT state ST6 that transitioned to the route notified. , RT state ST6 can be expected to loop. From this point of view as well, a sense of satisfaction is obtained for having obtained the transition to the RT state ST6 by itself.

Next, how the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in relation to the game section will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 19(a) shows a period in which the game section is a normal section, FIG. 19(b) shows a period in which the game section is an advantageous section, and FIG. 13) shows the timing at which the SB winning data is set, FIG. 19(d) shows the period in which the game state is the normal state ST1, and FIG. 19(e) shows the game state in the post-bonus state ST3. FIG. 19(f) shows the period during which the game state is the first preparation state ST4, FIG. 19(g) shows the period during which the game state is the second preparation state ST5, FIG. 19(h) shows a period in which the game state is the RT state ST6.

First, a case where a shift to the advantageous section occurs in the normal state ST1 will be described.

At the timing of t1, which is the normal section as shown in FIG. 19(a) and the normal state ST1 as shown in FIG. The value IV=6 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). When the SB winning data is set in the normal section, regardless of whether or not the SB winning is established in the game, the game is shifted to the advantageous section in the next game. Therefore, at the timing of t2, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIGS. 19(a) and 19(b).

When the SB winning data is set and the game shifts to the advantageous section, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed in the game shifted to the advantageous section. However, in the transition lottery process that is executed in response to the transition to the advantageous section in the normal state ST1, the result is basically lost. Then, when the transfer lottery process results in a loss, the advantageous section ends in the game in which the transfer lottery process was executed. Therefore, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIGS. 19(a) and 19(b) at the timing of t3 without transition to the RT state ST6.

Next, the case where the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 to shift to the advantageous section will be described.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 19(c) at the timing of t4 which is the normal section and the post-bonus state ST3 as shown in FIG. 19(e). The index value IV=6 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). As already explained, when the SB winning data is set in the normal section, regardless of whether or not the SB winning has been established in the game, the game is shifted to the advantageous section in the next game. Further, when the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3, if the SB winning is not established in the game, the game state shifts to the first preparation state ST4 from the next game. Since the SB prize was not established in the game in which the SB winning data was set this time, as shown in FIGS. At timing t5, which is the timing at which the next game is started for the game in which winning data is set, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the game state changes from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state. Move to ST4.

When the SB winning data is set and the game shifts to the advantageous section, as described above, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed in the game shifted to the advantageous section. In this case, since the transition lottery process is being executed in the first preparation state ST4, the transition lottery is basically won. Then, in the case of winning the transition lottery in the transition lottery process, basically, the transition to the normal state ST1 or the RT state ST6 occurs in the advantageous section and the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 is established. continue at least until In this case, if any of the index values IV=8 to 13 is won in the first preparation state ST4, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first promotion replay winning prize is notified. By stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in accordance with the notified stop order, the game state is changed from the first preparation state ST4 to the second state at the timing t6 as shown in FIGS. 19(f) and 19(g). It shifts to the preparation state ST5. Further, when any of the index values IV=8 to 13 is won in the second preparation state ST5, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the second promoted replay prize is informed. By stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in accordance with the notified stop order, the game state changes from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state at the timing t7 as shown in FIGS. 19(g) and 19(h). Move to ST6.

The RT state ST6 continues over 30 games, and when the 30th game is completed at the timing of t8, the game state changes from the RT state ST6 to the third game as shown in FIGS. 1 Move to the ready state ST4. Further, at the timing when this RT state ST6 ends, the continuation lottery process is executed according to the continuation rate set at that time. By continuously winning in the continuous lottery process, even if the RT state ST6 shifts to the first preparation state ST4, the state in which the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is established in the advantageous section is maintained. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19(f), after the first preparation state ST4 is performed over the timing of t8 to t9, the second preparation state is executed over the timing of t9 to t10 as shown in FIG. State ST5 is performed, and then RT state ST6 is performed over the timing from t10 to t11 as shown in FIG. 19(h).

After that, when the RT state ST6 ends at the timing of t11, the continued lottery process is executed and the condition is not met, although the area is in the advantageous section, the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are not satisfied. In this case, as shown in FIG. 19(f), in the first preparation state ST4 shifted at the timing of t11, even if the player wins with any of the index values IV=8 to 13, it is possible to establish the first promotion replay winning. The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R to be played is not reported. Therefore, it is not possible to establish the first promotion replay winning in the game that is won with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13, and at the timing of t12, the As shown, the game state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the normal state ST1. Also, by executing the advantageous interval initialization process at the timing of t12, the game interval shifts from the advantageous interval to the normal interval as shown in FIGS. 19(a) and 19(b). As a result, the state returns to the normal state ST1 and the normal section.

Next, the timing at which the lottery process for transitioning to the RT state ST6 is executed will be described in more detail. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing how the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. FIG. 20(a) shows the execution period of one game, FIG. 20(b) shows the timing when the SB winning data is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), and FIG. 20(c) shows the game interval. 20(d) shows the period during which the game section is the advantageous section; FIG. 20(e) shows the timing when the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is executed; FIG. 20(f) shows the execution period of the first BB state.

First, the case where the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed when the SB winning data is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 20(c), a new game is started as shown in FIG. 20(a) at the timing of t1, which is the normal section. Then, SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 20(b) in the combination lottery process (FIG. 13) executed at the start of this game. As a result, at the timing t2 when the game ends, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIGS. 20(c) and 20(d).

After that, as shown in FIG. 20(a), the next game is started at the timing of t3. Since this game is the first game after the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, at the timing of t3, which is the start time of the game, as shown in FIG. Lottery processing is executed. The probability of winning a transition lottery process in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 varies depending on the gaming state in which the transition lottery process is executed.

The lottery mode of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6, which is executed when the SB winning data is set in this way, will be described with reference to FIGS. 21(a) to 21(d). FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b) explain the first table for normal state and the second table for normal state which are referred to when the lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 is executed in normal state ST1. FIG. 21(c) is referred to when the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed in any of the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4 and the second preparation state ST5. FIG. 21(d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining tables for various states that are referred to when the lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 is executed in RT state ST6. It is an explanatory view for doing.

When the SB winning data is set in the normal state ST1 and the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed, either the first table for the normal state or the second table for the normal state is referred to. As shown in FIG. 21(a), the first table for the normal state has a 0% probability of winning and a 100% probability of losing in the shift lottery process. In other words, when the first table for the normal state is referred to and the transition lottery process is executed, the result is definitely lost. Then, in the case of a loss result in the shift lottery process, the advantageous section ends after one game, and the state of the normal state ST1 and the advantageous section returns to the state of the normal state ST1 and the normal section. do. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of games played in the advantageous section when the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied, and the number of games played in the advantageous section does not increase meaninglessly. It becomes possible to do so.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21(b), the second table for the normal state has a 100% probability of winning and a 0% probability of losing in the shift lottery process. In other words, when the second table for the normal state is referred to and the transition lottery process is executed, the winning result is assured. In addition, of the 6 levels of continuation rates, the 3 levels on the high continuation rate side are selected. Specifically, the 80% continuation rate is selected with a probability of 95%, and the 90% continuation A rate is chosen with a probability of 3% and a retention rate of 100% is chosen with a probability of 2%. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of executing the shift lottery process with reference to the second table for the normal state. In addition, the selected continuation rate is maintained until the advantageous interval end condition is established and the advantageous interval initialization process is executed. Incidentally, when the continuation rate of 100% is selected, even if the RT state ST6 is once terminated, the state in which the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is maintained until the termination condition for the advantageous section is satisfied. becomes. When it becomes an advantageous section in the normal state ST1 and a winning result is obtained in the shift lottery process, the state in which the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is maintained as the advantageous section at least until the state shifts to the first preparation state ST4. . Then, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped according to the stop order notified in the first preparation state ST4, thereby establishing the first promoted replay winning, and the reel 32L according to the stop order notified in the second preparation state ST5. , 32M, and 32R to establish the second promotion replay winning, the game moves to the RT state ST6.

As already explained, the normal state ST1 continues until the game for the normal side upper limit number of games (specifically, 999 games) is played unless a transition to the BB state ST2 occurs. In this case, when the number of remaining games up to the normal side upper limit number of games in the normal state ST1 is more than 50 games, the first table for the normal state is referred to in the shift lottery process, and the normal side upper limit game number in the normal state ST1 is referred to. When the number of remaining games is 50 or less, the second table for the normal state is referred to during the shift lottery process. As a result, it is possible to differentiate the advantage of the transition to the RT state ST6 according to the timing at which the SB winning data is set in the normal state ST1. In particular, when the remaining number of games up to the normal-side upper limit number of games in the normal state ST1 falls within a predetermined number of games range included in 10% or less of the normal-side upper limit number of games, the second table for the normal state is referred to. By doing so, it is possible to compensate for a long stay in the normal state ST1 without occurrence of both the BB state ST2 and the RT state ST6. The situation in which the second table for the normal state is referred to is not limited to the situation in which the number of games falls within the range of 10% or less of the upper limit number of games on the normal side, but is included in 20% or less. It may be a situation in which the number of games falls within a predetermined number of games, or a situation in which the number of games falls within a predetermined number of games in which the number of games is 5% or less.

When the SB winning data is set in any one of the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4 and the second preparation state ST5 and the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed, tables for various states are referred to. As shown in FIG. 21(c), the tables for various states have a 100% probability of winning and a 0% probability of losing in the transfer lottery process. In other words, when the transition lottery process is executed with reference to the tables for various states, the lottery results are surely obtained. In addition, although all of the six stages of continuation rate are selected, the selection rate of the three stages of the low continuation rate side is higher than the selection rate of the three stages of the high continuation rate side. Specifically, a 50% retention rate is selected with an 80% probability, a 60% retention rate is selected with a 12% probability, a 70% retention rate is selected with a 7% probability, and a 70% retention rate is selected with a 7% probability. A retention rate of 0.5% is selected, a 90% retention rate is selected with a 0.4% probability, and a 100% retention rate is selected with a 0.1% probability. In other words, the table for various states has a 100% probability of winning a winning result in the transition lottery process like the second table for normal state, but the expected value of the selected continuation rate is is lower than the second table for normal conditions. A situation in which the tables for various states are referred to by setting the continuation rate selection mode in this way is more advantageous than a situation in which the first table for the normal state is referred to. It is more disadvantageous than the situation where two tables are referenced.

In the post-bonus state ST3, when the index value IV=6 to which the SB winning data is set is won in the winning lottery process and the SB winning is established, the transition to the first preparation state ST4 does not occur, and the post-bonus state ST3. will stay in In this case, if the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 and in the normal section, the game next to the game in which the SB winning is established, that is, the game in the SB state and the bonus game. The game in the post-state ST3 is the first game after shifting to the advantageous section, and the shift lottery process is executed with reference to the tables for various states in this game. In addition, when the SB winning data is set in the first preparation state ST4 or the second preparation state ST5 in the normal section, and the SB winning is established, the game following the SB winning is established. A game that is in the SB state and is in the post-bonus state ST3 is the first game after shifting to the advantageous section, and a shift lottery process is executed with reference to tables for various states in the game. be done. Since these transition lottery processes result in winning results as described above, the state in which the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 is established in the advantageous section is maintained at least until the transition to the first preparation state ST4. Then, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped according to the stop order notified in the first preparation state ST4, thereby establishing the first promoted replay winning, and the reel 32L according to the stop order notified in the second preparation state ST5. , 32M, and 32R to establish the second promotion replay winning, the game moves to the RT state ST6.

In the post-bonus state ST3, if a win is made in the lottery process for the combination with the index value IV=6 to which the SB winning data is set and the SB winning is not established, a shift to the first preparation state ST4 occurs. Then, when the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 and the normal section, the game next to the game in which the SB winning data is set and in the first preparation state ST4. becomes the first game after shifting to the advantageous section, and transition lottery processing is executed with reference to tables for various states in the game. In addition, when the SB winning data is set in the first preparation state ST4 and the normal section, and the SB winning data is not established, the game next to the game in which the SB winning data is set is played. The game in the first preparation state ST4 is the first game after transition to the advantageous section, and the transition lottery process is executed with reference to the tables for various states in the game. Since these transition lottery processes result in a winning result as described above, the advantageous section is at least until one of the index values IV=8 to 13 in the first preparation state ST4 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). and the state in which the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is maintained. Then, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped according to the stop order notified in the first preparation state ST4, thereby establishing the first promoted replay winning, and the reel 32L according to the stop order notified in the second preparation state ST5. , 32M, and 32R to establish the second promotion replay winning, the game moves to the RT state ST6.

If the SB winning data is set in the second preparation state ST5 and the normal section, and the SB winning data is not established, the game is the game following the game in which the SB winning data is set. The game in the second preparatory state ST5 is the first game after shifting to the advantageous section, and the transition lottery process is executed with reference to the tables for various states in the game. Since these transition lottery processes result in a winning result as described above, the advantageous section is at least until one of the index values IV=8 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13). and the state in which the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is maintained. Then, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped according to the stop order notified in the second preparation state ST5, thereby establishing the second promoted replay winning prize, thereby shifting to the RT state ST6.

When the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 and the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed, the lottery table for the RT state is referred to. As shown in FIG. 21(d), the lottery table for the RT state has a 100% probability of a winning result and a 0% probability of a losing result in the shift lottery process. In other words, when the table for the RT state is referred to and the transition lottery process is executed, the lottery result is surely obtained. Further, only 100%, which is the highest continuation rate, can be selected from among the 6 levels of continuation rates. This makes it possible to make the situation in which the RT state table is referred to during the transition lottery process more advantageous than the situation in which another table is referred to during the transition lottery process.

The RT state ST6 is basically shifted to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is basically maintained in the RT state ST6. However, if the number of games continued in the advantageous section without transitioning to the normal section reaches the maximum number of games (specifically, 1500 games), the advantageous section is initialized regardless of the game state at that time. is executed and the normal section is entered. In addition, even if the number of games has not reached the maximum number of games, the number of games continued in the advantageous section without transitioning to the normal section is the number of games that is less than the maximum number of games (specifically, 1450 games). In the above situation, in other words, in a situation where the remaining number of games up to the upper limit number of games falls within a specific number of games range of 5% or less of the upper limit number of games, a new transition to the RT state ST6 occurs. In this case, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section when transitioning to the RT state ST6, and in the RT state ST6 the normal section starts from the first game. However, in the RT state ST6, the same lottery table is referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in both the normal section and the advantageous section. There is no set combination for which the degree of advantage differs depending on whether or not the stop order is notified. That is, the advantage of the RT state ST6 is the same in both the normal section and the advantageous section. When the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 and the normal section, the game next to the game in which the SB winning data is set regardless of whether or not the SB winning is established in the game. The game in the RT state ST6 is the first game after shifting to the advantageous section, and the shift lottery process is executed with reference to the table for the RT state in this game. Then, when the transfer lottery process is executed with reference to the table for the RT state, the winning result is surely obtained and the continuation rate of 100% is surely selected as described above.

With the above configuration, it is possible to create a situation in which the advantageous interval continues beyond the upper limit number of games, sandwiching the RT state ST6 where the advantage is the same as in the case of the advantageous interval although it is a normal interval. As a result, the player expects that the advantageous section will substantially continue beyond the upper limit number of games, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In particular, when the transition lottery process is executed with reference to the table for the RT state, the continuation rate of 100% is surely selected. The interval continues up to the upper limit number of games or the number of trigger games with a high probability. In other words, it is possible to create a situation in which the advantageous section continues for more than twice the number of trigger games with a high probability. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for setting the SB winning data in the situation where the advantageous section continues over the number of trigger games and the RT state ST6 is the normal section.

If the SB winning data is not set in the RT state ST6 and the normal section, the first preparation state ST4 to which the RT state ST6 ends is also the normal section. Then, as already explained, in the first preparation state ST4 and in the normal section, in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), if any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 is won, the first promotion The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of a replay prize is not notified, and when the first promotion replay prize is not established, the game shifts to the normal state ST1. As a result, the player strongly expects the SB winning data to be set in the RT state ST6 and in the normal section, which makes it possible to improve the interest in the game.

Incidentally, in the RT state ST6 and in the normal section, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 perform an effect that allows the player to recognize the situation. As a result, it is possible to preferably increase the player's expectation for the setting of the SB winning data in this situation.

Next, referring again to FIG. 20, the case where the lottery process for transitioning to the RT state ST6 is executed in response to the transition to the first BB state in the normal section will be described.

As shown in FIG. 20(c), a new game is started as shown in FIG. 20(a) at the timing of t4, which is the normal section. Then, the first BB prize is established in this game. As a result, at the timing t5 when the game ends, the state is shifted to the first BB state as shown in FIG. 20(f). Further, when the transition to the first BB state occurs in the normal section, a process for shifting the game section from the normal section to the advantageous section is executed. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIGS. 20(c) and 20(d).

After that, as shown in FIG. 20(a), the next game is started at the timing of t6. Since this game is the first game after the game section has shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, at the timing of t6, which is the start time of the game, as shown in FIG. Lottery processing is executed. A table for the first BB state is referred to in this transition lottery process.

FIG. 21(e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the table for the first BB state. The table for the first BB state has a 5% probability of winning and a 95% probability of losing in the transition lottery process. In addition, all of the 6 stages of continuation rate are selected, but the selection rate of the 3 stages of the low continuation rate side is higher than the selection rate of the 3 stages of the high continuation rate side. Specifically, when a winning result is obtained in the transfer lottery process, a continuation rate of 50% is selected with a probability of 2%, a continuation rate of 60% is selected with a probability of 1%, and a continuation rate of 70% is selected. A rate of 1% is selected, an 80% retention rate is selected with a 0.5% probability, a 90% retention rate is selected with a 0.4% probability, and a 100% retention rate is selected with a 0.4% probability. 1% chance of being selected. Therefore, the situation in which the table for the first BB state is consulted is advantageous over the situation in which the first table for the normal state is consulted, the second table for the normal state, the table for the various states and the table for the RT state. table is referenced.

The advantageous section is maintained in the first BB state regardless of whether or not a winning result is obtained in the transition lottery process executed in the first game in the first BB state. Then, when the lottery opportunity is won in the first BB state, if the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are not established, the lottery processing for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed, and the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are established. If so, promotion lottery processing for the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is executed. In other words, in the first BB state, the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 may be satisfied not only at the start of the first BB state, but also at some intermediate timing. Further, when the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 are already satisfied in the first BB state, the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 may increase at a timing in the middle of the first BB state. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the first BB state.

Next, a specific processing configuration that enables setting of the game state as described above will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a corresponding process executed by the main MPU 72 when the game ends. Incidentally, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed in step S309 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). Since the process of step S309 is executed after the reel control process, it is executed when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R all stop rotating in one game and the game ends.

First, control processing of the game section is executed (step S601). In the control processing of the game section, a process for shifting the game section between the normal section and the advantageous section is executed, the details of which will be described later. Thereafter, BB processing is executed (step S602). In the BB processing, the processing for shifting to the BB state ST2 and the processing for advancing the BB state ST2 are executed, the details of which will be described later.

Thereafter, on the condition that it is not in the BB state ST2 (step S603: NO), a process for jumping to the process corresponding to the value of the state counter provided in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S604). The state counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify which of the game state is the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, or the RT state ST6. . When the value of the state counter is "0", the normal state processing (step S605) is executed to advance the normal state ST1, and when the value of the state counter is "1", the post-bonus state ST3 is advanced. If the value of the state counter is "2", the first preparation state processing (step S607) for advancing the first preparation state ST4 is executed, and the state If the value of the counter is "3", the second ready state processing (step S608) is executed to advance the second ready state ST5, and if the value of the state counter is "4", the RT state ST6 is entered. RT state processing (step S609) is executed for progress. When the clearing process (step S105) of the main side RAM 74 is executed, the value of the state counter becomes "0".

FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing normal state processing (step S605). As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, so the normal state processing is also executed when the game ends.

First, 1 is added to the ceiling game number counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S701). The ceiling game number counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to grasp the number of games continued in the normal state ST1 without transitioning to the BB state ST2. If the value of the ceiling game number counter incremented by 1 is the normal side upper limit number of games (step S702: YES), the value of the state counter is incremented by 2 (step S703). This causes the value of the state counter to be "2" corresponding to execution of the first ready state process. That is, the game state shifts from the normal state ST1 to the first preparation state ST4. Also, the value of the ceiling game number counter is cleared to "0" (step S704).

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing post-bonus state processing (step S606). As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, the post-bonus state processing is also executed when the game ends.

If index value IV=6 is won and SB winning data is set (step S801: YES) in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in the current game, whether or not the SB winning has been established in the current game is determined (step S802). When the SB winning has been established (step S802: NO), 1 is added to the value of the state counter (step S803). This causes the value of the state counter to be "2" corresponding to execution of the first ready state process. That is, the game state shifts from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4. On the other hand, if the SB winning has been established (step S802: YES), the post-bonus state processing is terminated. As a result, even if the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3, the post-bonus state ST3 remains as it is when the SB winning is established. Further, with the above configuration, the post-bonus state ST3 continues at least until the SB winning data is set unless a transition to the BB state ST2 occurs.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the first preparation state process (step S607). It should be noted that, as described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, so the first preparation state processing is also executed when the game ends.

If SB winning has been established in the current game (step S901: YES), the value of the state counter is set to "1" (step S902). As a result, the game state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the post-bonus state ST3.

If any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 is won in the current game and the first promotion replay prize is established (step S903 and step S904: YES), 1 is added to the value of the state counter. (Step S905). This causes the value of the state counter to become "3" corresponding to execution of the second ready state process. That is, the game state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5. On the other hand, if any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 is won in this game, but the first promotion replay prize is not established (step S903: YES, step S904: NO), the state counter is cleared to "0". (step S906). As a result, the game state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the normal state ST1.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the second preparation state process (step S608). It should be noted that, as described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, so the second preparation state processing is also executed when the game ends.

If SB winning has been established in the current game (step S1001: YES), the value of the state counter is set to "1" (step S1002). As a result, the game state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the post-bonus state ST3.

If any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 is won in the current game and the second promotion replay prize is established (step S1003 and step S1004: YES), 1 is added to the value of the state counter. (Step S1005). This causes the value of the state counter to be "4" corresponding to the execution of RT state processing. That is, the game state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6. Also, "30" is set in the RT game number counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1006). The RT game number counter is a counter for the main side MPU 72 to grasp the remaining number of continuous games in the RT state ST6.

On the other hand, if any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 has been won in the current game but the second promotion replay winning has not been established (step S1003: YES, step S1004: NO), the state counter is cleared to "0". (step S1007). As a result, the game state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the normal state ST1.

Here, a processing configuration for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the first preparation state ST4 and the second preparation state ST5 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing notification control processing. The notification control process is executed at step S412 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). Since the winning lottery process is executed before the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating at the start of the game, the notification control process is also executed before the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating at the start of the game. executed.

In the first preparation state ST4, if the winning is made with any of the index values IV=8 to 13 (step S1101: YES), the advantageous interval flag provided in the main side RAM74 is set to "1" and the main side RAM74 is set to "0" (step S1102). The advantageous section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is an advantageous section. When the advantageous section flag is set to "1", it is an advantageous section, and the value of the advantageous section flag is "0". ” is the normal interval.

The advantageous end preparation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 are not satisfied in the advantageous section. If it is, it means that the condition for transition to RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section. When the advantageous end preparation flag is set to "1", even if the player wins with any of the index values IV=8 to 13 in the first preparation state ST4 and in the advantageous section, the first promotion replay prize is awarded. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be established is not reported, and furthermore, in the second preparation state ST5 and in the advantageous section, the winning is made with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13. However, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second promotion replay prize is not notified. On the other hand, when the value of the advantageous end preparation flag is "0", in the first preparation state ST4 and in the advantageous section, if any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 is won, the first promotion replay When the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of a prize is reported, and furthermore, in the second preparation state ST5 and in the advantageous section, the winning is made with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13. is notified of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second promotion replay winning prize.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, the first display data setting process is executed (step S1103). In the setting process of the first display data, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first promotion replay prize is based on the information of the combination that was won this time among the index values IV=8 to 13. The display of the combined display section 66 is controlled so that the display of the value corresponding to is started on the combined display section 66 . As a result, values corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable establishment of the first promotion replay prize are displayed on the combined display section 66, as shown in FIG. 8B, for example. This display on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the current game. Also, the first stop order command is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S1104). Information is set in the first stop order command so that the production side MPU 92 can specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first promotion replay prize in the current game.

In the second preparation state ST5, if the winning is made with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 (step S1105: YES), the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the advantageous end of the main RAM 74 is set. It is determined whether the value of the preparation flag is "0" (step S1106). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, second display data setting processing is executed (step S1107). In the process of setting the second display data, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay prize based on the information of the combination that was won this time among the index values IV=8 to 13. The combined display section 66 is controlled so that the display of the value corresponding to is started on the combined display section 66 . As a result, values corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable establishment of the second promotion replay winning are displayed on the combined display section 66, for example, as shown in FIG. 8(b). This display on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the current game. Also, the second stop order command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1108). Information is set in the second stop order command so that the effect-side MPU 92 can specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second promotion replay prize in the current game.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing notification processing executed by the MPU 92 on the effect side. Note that the notification process is repeatedly executed in the effect-side MPU 92 at a relatively short period (for example, 4 msec).

When the first stop order command or the second stop order command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1201: YES), an image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the stop order command received this time is displayed on the image display device. In step S1202, data necessary for display is set. However, at this timing, the image display device 63 does not display the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current stop order command. After that, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in the measurement counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1203). The notification delay period is set as a period shorter than the acceleration period until the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating and reach a constant speed rotation, and is set to 0.5 msec, for example. The value set in the measurement counter is decremented each time the notification process is started.

In the notification processing, when the notification delay period measured using the measurement counter of the effect-side RAM 94 has elapsed (step S1204: YES), notification start processing is executed (step S1205). In the notification start process, an image is displayed on the image display device 63 based on the data set in step S1202. As a result, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is displayed on the image display device 63, for example, as shown in FIG. 8(a). This display on the image display device 63 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the current game.

In the case of the above configuration, after the timing at which notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started on the shared display unit 66 whose display is directly controlled by the main side MPU 72, directly by the effect side MPU 92 A notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started on the image display device 63 whose display is controlled. As a result, when the image display device 63 is performing the notification regarding the winning combination, the combination display unit 66 is assuredly performing the notification regarding the winning combination, and the reels being performed on the image display device 63. When confirming whether or not the notification corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R is due to fraud by using the display contents of the combined display section 66, the confirmation can be performed at an arbitrary timing. It becomes possible.

The notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63 end at the same or substantially the same timing. However, it is not limited to this, and after the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63 is completed, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 may be configured such that the notification corresponding to is terminated, or this order may be reversed.

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing RT state processing (step S609). As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, so the RT state processing is also executed when the game ends.

First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the RT game number counter in the main RAM 74 (step S1301). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the RT game number counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1302). When the value of the RT game number counter is "0" (step S1302: YES), it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1303). That is, it is determined whether or not the game section is the advantageous section. As already explained, the RT state ST6 is basically an advantageous section, but the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section exceeds the number of trigger games (specifically, 1450 games). If so, it becomes a normal section in the RT state ST6. Then, when the RT state ST6 is the normal section and the SB winning data is not set and the final game of the RT state ST6 is reached, a negative determination is made in step S1303. On the other hand, if the RT state ST6 is the final game in the advantageous section in the RT state ST6, an affirmative determination is made in step S1303.

If the determination in step S1303 is affirmative, a continuous lottery process is executed (step S1304). In the continuation lottery process, the continuation lottery table corresponding to the information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 stored in the main side RAM 74 is read from the main side ROM 73 . Then, by comparing the value of the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 with the continuous lottery table, it is determined whether or not the lottery is continuously won. In addition, as already explained, the probability of being continuously selected in the continuous lottery process has six stages of 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90% and 100%.

If the player wins continuously (step S1305: YES), after setting the value of the state counter to "2" (step S1307), the RT state processing is terminated. In this case, the advantageous interval flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is "0". Therefore, the transition to the first preparation state ST4 is made in an advantageous section and in a situation where the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 are satisfied.

On the other hand, if the continuation is lost (step S1305: NO), the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1306), and after setting the value of the state counter to "2" (step S1307), this RT state processing is terminated. In this case, the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". Therefore, the transition to the first preparation state ST4 is made in a situation in which the conditions for transitioning to the RT state ST6 are not established in the advantageous section.

Next, the relationship between the set value and the probability of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section and the probability that the benefit relating to the RT state ST6 is given after shifting to the advantageous section will be described.

As already explained, the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is
(1) When a game with SB winning data set ends in a normal section, or (2) When a game in which the 1st BB win is established in a normal section ends Occurs when In addition to this,
(3) If there is a chance that the second promotion replay win is established in the normal section and the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs, the transition to the advantageous section also occurs.

The probability of occurrence of any of these triggers (1) to (3) is common to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6" of the slot machine 10. FIG. This content will be described in detail. FIG. 30(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the point value PV set for each combination and the set value when the combination lottery process (FIG. 13) is executed in the normal state ST1.

As already explained, in the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5 and the RT state ST6, the winning data set to the index values IV=1 to 6 and their index values IV=1 to The point value PV set to 6 is the same as in the normal state ST1. Winning data set to index value IV=7 is normal replay winning data in any of normal state ST1, post-bonus state ST3, first preparation state ST4, second preparation state ST5 and RT state ST6. Although common, the point value PV set to the index value IV=7 differs according to each game state ST1, ST3 to ST6. However, the point value PV set to the index value IV=7 is common to all the setting values of "setting 1" to "setting 6" in any of the game states ST1, ST3 to ST6.

As shown in FIG. 30(a), the point value PV differs depending on the setting values of "setting 1" to "setting 6" among the index values IV=1 to 7, that is, the combination with different winning probability is the bell winning data. is set to index value IV=1, watermelon winning data is set to index value IV=2, cherry winning data is set to index value IV=3, and second BB winning data is set to index value IV=5. The index value IV=4 set with the 1st BB winning data, the index value IV=6 with the SB winning data set, and the index value IV=7 with the normal replay winning data set all win. The probability is common to all setting values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In this case, the SB winning data for triggering the above (1) is set to the index value IV=6. As a result, the probability of occurrence of the trigger (1) is common to all the setting values of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

The first BB winning data for triggering the above (2) is set to an index value IV=4, and the probability of winning the first BB when the first BB winning data is set is "setting 1". . . . are common and do not vary according to the set values of “setting 6”. As a result, the probability of occurrence of the trigger (2) is common to all the setting values of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

As described above, the trigger of (3) is that the reels 32L and 32M are won in the second preparation state ST5 with any of the index values IV=8 to 13, and the reels 32L and 32M are stopped in the order corresponding to the index value IV that is the winning target. , 32R, and the second promotion replay win is established. In this case, the point values PV set to index values IV=8 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5 are common to all the setting values of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and the second preparation state ST5 In the state ST5 and in the normal section, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second promotion replay prize regardless of which of the set values is "setting 1" to "setting 6" is not reported. As a result, the probability of occurrence of the above trigger (3) is common to all the setting values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". Note that the index values IV=8 to 13 also exist in the first preparation state ST4, but the point values PV set to these index values IV=8 to 13 are "setting 1" to "setting 6." Common to all setting values.

In the above configuration, the index values IV=1 to 3, 5 whose winning probability fluctuates in accordance with the setting values of "setting 1" to "setting 6" are not set as transition opportunities for the advantageous section. Therefore, the probability of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is common for all setting values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantage or a disadvantage depending on the set value regarding the frequency of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section.

In the configuration in which the probability of transitioning to the advantageous section is common to all set values as described above, when the normal section transitions to the advantageous section as described above, the profit related to the RT state ST6 is given in the advantageous section. The probability is also common to all setting values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In detail, in both cases where the SB winning data is set as already explained and when the 1st BB prize is established, the game that is first started in the advantageous section when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section At , a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. This transition lottery process is surely executed in the game that is first started in the advantageous zone in the case of shifting from the normal zone to the advantageous zone. irrelevant.

As already explained, the tables referred to in the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 are the first table for the normal state (FIG. 21(a)) and the second table for the normal state in the case of the normal state ST1. (FIG. 21(b)), and if it is the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, or the second preparation state ST5, it is a table for various states (FIG. 21(c)), and the RT state ST6 If so, it is the table for the RT state (FIG. 21(d)), and if it is the first BB state, it is the table for the first BB state (FIG. 21(e)). Although each of these tables differs in the selection mode of the winning probability and the continuation rate selected when the winning result is obtained, all set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6" are common. Further, as already explained, the probability of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is also common for all setting values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". Furthermore, when the second promotion replay winning is established in the normal section, regardless of which one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", the situation shifts to the RT state ST6 and the advantageous section. Therefore, not only the frequency of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, but also the probability that the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are established when the transition to the advantageous section is triggered are common. As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantageous or disadvantageous setting value from occurring with respect to the probability that the conditions for transitioning to the RT state ST6 are met when the transition to the advantageous section is triggered.

The lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed even when a predetermined winning combination is won in the first BB state, which is an advantageous section, and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not established. In addition, if a predetermined combination is won in the first BB state, the advantageous section, and the conditions for transition to RT state ST6 are satisfied, it is possible to increase the continuation rate of RT state ST6. A promotion lottery process is executed. In this case, the probability of execution of these transition lottery processing and promotion lottery processing, and the probability of winning results in each lottery processing are also common for all set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". . This content will be described in detail. FIG. 30(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the point value PV set for each combination and the set value when the combination lottery process (FIG. 13) is executed in the first BB state.

As shown in FIG. 30(b), index values IV=1 to 4 are common to all setting values of "setting 1" to "setting 6" for the winning probability. In this case, the above-mentioned predetermined combination that triggers the execution of the lottery process for moving to the RT state ST6 and the lottery process for promotion of the continuation rate in the first BB state is the index value IV=2 and 3. Further, when a predetermined winning combination is won in the first BB state, if the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are not met, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is surely executed, and the state shifts to the RT state ST6. If the transition condition of (1) is established, the promotion lottery process for the continuation rate is surely executed on the condition that the continuation rate is not the maximum. As a result, the probability that a predetermined winning combination is won in the first BB state and the transition lottery process or the promotion lottery process is executed is common to all set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In addition, the probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process executed in this case and the probability of execution in the promotion lottery process are also common for all set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, the probability of winning a predetermined combination in the first BB state and receiving a profit in the RT state ST6 can be made common to all set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". Therefore, regarding the provision of the benefit, it is possible to avoid giving advantage or disadvantage depending on the set value.

Incidentally, even if a transition to the second BB state occurs in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section does not occur. In addition, in the second BB state, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 30(c), with respect to the index value IV=1, the winning probability is common to all setting values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". , index values IV=2 to 4, the winning probabilities differ according to the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As already explained, the winning probability of the index value IV=5 in which the second BB winning data is set in any of the game states ST1, ST3 to ST6 depends on the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". are different. On the other hand, in the second BB state, regardless of whether or not the predetermined winning combination is won, the lottery process for moving to the RT state ST6 and the lottery process for increasing the continuation rate are not executed.

With the above configuration, the probability of transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the probability that the profit regarding RT state ST6 is given after transitioning to the advantageous section, are all of "setting 1" to "setting 6". It is possible to make the setting values common. Therefore, with respect to the probability of transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section and the probability that the benefit relating to the RT state ST6 is given after transitioning to the advantageous section, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of advantage or disadvantage depending on the set value. .

Next, a specific processing configuration for enabling various settings of the game section and a specific processing configuration for providing profits relating to the RT state ST6 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing control processing of the game section executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG. Note that the control processing of the game section is executed at step S601 in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 22). Further, as described above, the processing for dealing with the end of the game is executed when the game ends, so the control processing for the game section is also executed when the game ends.

First, 1 is added to the value of the total number of games counter 74a provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1401). The total number-of-games counter 74a is a counter for counting the number of games completed regardless of the game state and the game interval.

In the control processing of the game section, if the second promotion replay prize is established in the current game (step S1402: YES), it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". , it is determined whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section (step S1403). When the current game section is not the advantageous section but the normal section (step S1403: NO), the advantageous section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" and the advantageous start flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". is set, and the value of the continuous game number counter in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1404). As a result, when the second promotion replay winning is established in the normal section and the game shifts to the RT state ST6, the shift to the advantageous section occurs at the end of the game. The advantageous start flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the first game has not yet started after shifting to the advantageous section.

After that, lighting processing is executed to turn on the advantageous section display section 67 (step S1405). As a result, when the advantageous interval starts, the advantageous interval display part 67 is turned on, and by visually confirming the advantageous interval display part 67, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp whether it is the advantageous interval. becomes possible.

Thereafter, a continuation rate setting process is executed (step S1406). In the continuation rate setting process, the lowest continuation rate of 50% is stored in the main RAM 74 as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. As a result, the advantage is extremely high when the second promotion replay prize is established and the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in a situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified in the normal section. It is possible to prevent it from being lost. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the highest continuation rate is selected, or a configuration in which an intermediate continuation rate is selected may be employed. Alternatively, a lottery process may be executed in the continuation rate setting process, so that one of six stages of continuation rates is determined by lottery. In this case, the lowest continuation rate may be selected with the highest probability, the highest continuation rate may be selected with the highest probability, or an intermediate continuation rate may be selected with the highest probability. It may be configured to be higher, it may be configured to have a lower expected value of the continuation rate than when the second promotion replay winning is established in the advantageous section and the transition to RT state ST6 occurs, and the second promotion replay may be configured in the advantageous section. The expected value of the continuation rate may be higher than in the case where winning is established and the transition to RT state ST6 occurs.

If the current game section is an advantageous section (step S1403: YES), it is determined whether or not the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1407). As already explained, the advantageous end preparation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 are not satisfied in the advantageous section, and the advantageous end preparation flag is set to "1". If it is, it means that the condition for transition to RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section. If the advantageous end preparation flag is set to "1" (step S1407: YES), after clearing the value of the advantageous end preparation flag to "0" (step S1408), the continuation rate setting process already described is executed. (Step S1406). As a result, when the second promotion replay prize is established and the RT state ST6 is shifted to in a situation where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section, the RT state ST6 is transitioned to at the end of the game. The continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set when the transition condition is established.

In the game section control process, when the value of the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is "0", that is, when the game section is the normal section, and when the SB winning data is set in the current game (step S1409 and step S1410: YES), the advantageous section flag and advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74 are set to "1", and the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1411). As a result, when the SB winning data is set in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section occurs at the end of the game. Further, lighting processing is executed to turn on the advantageous section display section 67 (step S1412). As a result, when the advantageous interval starts, the advantageous interval display part 67 is turned on, and by visually confirming the advantageous interval display part 67, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp whether it is the advantageous interval. becomes possible.

In the game section control process, when the value of the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is "0", that is, when the game section is the normal section, and when the 1st BB prize is established in the current game (step S1409). and step S1413: YES), the advantageous section flag and the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74 are set to "1" and the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1414). As a result, when the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section occurs at the end of the game. Further, lighting processing is executed to turn on the advantageous section display section 67 (step S1415). As a result, when the advantageous interval starts, the advantageous interval display part 67 is turned on, and by visually confirming the advantageous interval display part 67, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp whether it is the advantageous interval. becomes possible.

Here, when the SB winning data is set in the normal section and shifts to the advantageous section, or when the 1st BB prize is established in the normal section and shifts to the advantageous section, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing transition trigger processing for the RT state ST6 executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that the RT state ST6 shift trigger process is executed at step S413 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). Further, since the combination lottery process is executed when the game is started, the RT state ST6 shift trigger process is also executed when the game is started.

First, by determining whether or not the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", it is determined whether or not the game is to be started first after the transition to the advantageous section occurs ( step S1501). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, after clearing the advantageous start flag of the main side RAM 74 to "0" (step S1502), it is checked whether or not the information of the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set in the main side RAM 74. Determine (step S1503). The situation where the advantageous start flag is set to "1" and the information on the continuation rate of RT state ST6 is set means that the second promotion replay winning is established in the normal section, and the advantageous section is entered. Applicable to the situation in which the transition occurred. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, and the transition trigger processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the SB winning data is set in the normal section or when the 1st BB prize is established in the normal section, the advantageous start flag is set to "1" and the information of the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set. It becomes a situation where it is not. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1503.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503, a lottery process for shifting to RT state ST6 is executed (step S1504). In the transition lottery process, if the current gaming state is the normal state ST1, the number of games remaining to the normal side upper limit number of games in the normal state ST1 is 50 games by checking the value of the ceiling game number counter of the main side RAM 74. Determine whether it is greater than When the number of remaining games up to the normal upper limit number of games in the normal state ST1 is more than 50 games, the first table for the normal state (FIG. 21(a)) is read out from the main ROM 73 and When the number of games remaining until the normal side upper limit number of games is 50 games or less, the second table for the normal state (FIG. 21(b)) is read. Also, if the current gaming state is one of the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5, the tables for various states (FIG. 21(c)) are read out from the main ROM 73. FIG. Also, if the current game state is the RT state ST6, the RT state table (FIG. 21(d)) is read from the main-side ROM 73 . Also, if the current gaming state is the 1BB state, the table for the 1BB state (FIG. 21(e)) is read from the main ROM 73 . In the shift lottery process, after reading one of the tables, the value of the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the read lottery counter value is collated with the table that has been read. .

When the result of the lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 is a loss result (step S1505: NO), the advantageous end preparation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1506). As already explained, the advantageous end preparation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 are not satisfied in the advantageous section, and the advantageous end preparation flag is set to "1". If it is, it means that the condition for transition to RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section. Therefore, when the advantageous end preparation flag is set to "1", the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped to enable establishment of the first promotion replay prize even in the advantageous section in the first preparation state ST4. The order is not notified, and furthermore, when the advantageous end preparation flag is set to "1", even if it is an advantageous section in the second preparation state ST5, it is possible to establish the second promotion replay prize. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified.

When the result of the lottery process for shifting to RT state ST6 is a winning result (step S1505: YES), the value of the advantageous end preparation flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1507). As a result, the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are established in the advantageous section. Also, a continuation rate storage process is executed (step S1508). In the continuation rate storage process, information on the continuation rate selected when a winning result is obtained in the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is stored in the main side RAM 74 .

Due to the above processing configuration, when the game is shifted to the advantageous section, the lottery process for transitioning to the RT state ST6 is executed in the first game started in the advantageous section. Further, the transition lottery process is performed in a lottery mode according to the game state at that time.

Execution of lottery processing for shifting to the RT state ST6 in the normal state ST1 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 33(a) shows the period during which the game section is the advantageous section, FIG. 33(b) shows the period during which the normal state ST1, and FIG. 33(c) shows the normal side upper limit game in the normal state ST1. 33(d) shows the timing when the SB winning data is set, and FIG. 33(e) indicates the timing at which the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is executed, FIG. FIG. 33(h) shows the period of the second preparation state ST5, and FIG. 33(i) shows the period of the RT state ST6.

First, the case where the SB winning data is set only before the pre-ceiling period in the normal state ST1 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 33(a) and 33(b), SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 33(d) at timing t1, which is the normal section and the normal state ST1. In this case, at the end of the game in which the SB winning data is set, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 33(a). Also, at the timing of t2, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed as shown in FIG. 33(e). In this case, since the first table for the normal state (FIG. 21(a)) is referred to, the result of the shift lottery process is certainly a failure result. Therefore, at the timing t2, the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 33(f). Although the detailed processing configuration will be described later, when the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" in the situation of the normal state ST1 and the advantageous section, the lottery processing to shift to the RT state ST6 is executed. At the end of the game that was executed, that is, at the end of the game that was first executed after shifting to the advantageous section, initialization processing for the advantageous section is executed. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIG. 33(a), and the value of the advantageous end preparation flag is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 33(f). be.

After that, at the timing of t4, the remaining number of games up to the normal side upper limit number of games in the normal state ST1 becomes 50 games or less, so that the pre-ceiling period starts as shown in FIG. 33(c). During this pre-ceiling period, the SB winning data is not set, and the number of games continued in the normal state ST1 at the timing of t5 reaches the normal side upper limit number of games, and as shown in FIG. When the period ends, the game state shifts from the normal state ST1 to the first preparation state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 33(b) and 33(g). This first preparation state ST4 is started in a situation where the game section is the normal section. In the first preparation state ST4 and in the normal section, one of the index values IV=8 to 13 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first promotion replay prize is not reported. 33(b) and 33(g), the game state changes from the first preparation state ST4 to the normal state at the timing of t6 because the first promotion replay winning prize cannot be established in this game. Move to ST1.

Next, the case where the SB winning data is set in the pre-ceiling period of the normal state ST1 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 33(a) and 33(b), at timing t7, which is the normal section and normal state ST1, the remaining number of games up to the normal side upper limit number of games in normal state ST1 is 50 games or less. As a result, the pre-ceiling period is reached as shown in FIG. 33(c). Then, at the timing of t8, which is the pre-ceiling period, SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 33(d). In this case, at the end of the game in which the SB winning data is set, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 33(a). Also, at the timing of t9, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed as shown in FIG. 33(e). In this case, since the second table for the normal state (FIG. 21(b)) is referred to, the result of the shift lottery process is surely the winning result. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 33(f), the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1" and the value of the advantageous end preparation flag is maintained at "0". Although the detailed processing configuration will be described later, when the value of the advantageous end preparation flag is "0" in the normal state ST1 and in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is maintained.

After that, at the timing of t10, the number of games continued in the normal state ST1 reaches the normal side upper limit number of games, and as shown in FIG. As shown in (g), the game state shifts from the normal state ST1 to the first preparation state ST4. This first preparation state ST4 is started when the game section is an advantageous section and the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are met. In the first preparation state ST4 and in the advantageous section, one of the index values IV=8 to 13 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first promotion replay prize is notified. Then, by establishing the first promotion replay winning in this game, the game state changes from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5 as shown in FIGS. 33(g) and 33(h) at timing t11. transition to

This second preparation state ST5 is started when the game section is an advantageous section and the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are met. In the second preparatory state ST5 and in the advantageous section, one of the index values IV=8 to 13 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second promotion replay prize is reported. Then, by establishing the second promotion replay winning in this game, the game state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6 as shown in FIGS. 33(h) and 33(i) at the timing of t12. do.

With the above configuration, when the SB winning data is set in the pre-ceiling period in the normal state ST1, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. This makes it possible to compensate for a long stay in the normal state ST1 without occurrence of both the BB state ST2 and the RT state ST6.

In the normal state ST1, when the number of continuous games in the normal state ST1 reaches the normal side upper limit number of games without setting the SB winning data in the pre-ceiling period, the state is changed to the first preparation state ST4 in the normal section. Transition. As a result, it is possible to increase the importance of setting the SB winning data in the limited pre-ceiling period, and it is possible to increase the attention of the game during the pre-ceiling period.

Even if the SB winning data is set in the pre-ceiling period and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied, the normal state ST1 will not end in the middle, and the number of games continued in the normal state ST1 will reach the normal side upper limit number of games. When it reaches, the game state shifts from the normal state ST1 to the first preparation state ST4. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making the transition processing of the game state constant.

Next, BB processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Incidentally, the BB process is executed at step S602 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 22). In addition, as described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, so the BB processing is also executed when the game ends.

If the first BB prize has been won in the current game (step S1601: YES), the first BB flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1602). The first BB flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that it is in the first BB state. After that, the value of the total payout counter provided in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1603). The total payout counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to count the total number of game media given to the player in one BB state ST2.

When the 2nd BB prize is established in the current game (step S1604: YES), the 2nd BB flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1605). The second BB flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that it is in the second BB state. After that, the value of the total payout counter in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1603).

If the first BB flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1606: YES), the first BB process is executed to control the progress of the first BB state (step S1607). If the second BB flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1608: YES), the second BB process is executed to control the progress of the second BB state (step S1609).

FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the processing for the first BB in step S1607.

If the index value IV = 2 or 3 in the situation of the advantageous section and the lottery is won (step S1701: YES), it is determined whether or not the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1702). When the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the lottery process (step S1504) for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed when the first game in the first BB state is started as described above. Then, when the transfer lottery process results in a loss, the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1702.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, a lottery process for shifting to RT state ST6 is executed (step S1703). In the transition lottery process, the transition table in the BB corresponding to the winning combination this time is read out from the main ROM 73, the value of the lottery counter updated periodically is read out in the main RAM 74, and the read lottery counter is read out. value against the migration table in the BB. The transition table in the BB corresponding to the index value IV=2 has a 25% probability of winning the transition to RT state ST6. In addition, the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 that can be selected in the case of a winning result is the lower four stages among the six stages, and the selection rates of these four stages are equal. The transition table in the BB corresponding to the index value IV=3 has a 50% probability of winning the transition to RT state ST6. In addition, the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 that can be selected in the event of a winning result is 4 stages excluding the maximum 100% and the minimum 50%, and the selection rates of these 4 stages are equal. .

When the result of the lottery process for shifting to RT state ST6 is a winning result (step S1704: YES), the value of the advantageous end preparation flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1705). As a result, the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are established in the advantageous section. Also, the retention rate is stored (step S1706). In the continuation rate storage process, information on the continuation rate selected when a winning result is obtained in the lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 in step S1703 is stored in the main RAM 74 . It should be noted that if the result of the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is a failure result (step S1704: NO), since the process of step S1705 is not executed, the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". state is maintained.

If a negative determination is made in step S1702, it means that the conditions for transition to RT state ST6 have already been satisfied, so instead of the transition lottery process to RT state ST6, the continuation rate promotion lottery process is executed ( step S1707). In the promotion lottery process, the promotion table corresponding to the winning combination this time is read out from the main ROM 73, the value of the lottery counter that is periodically updated is read out in the main RAM 74, and the value of the read lottery counter is stored. Check against the promotion table above. The promotion table corresponding to the index value IV=2 has a 25% probability of being promoted. The promotion table corresponding to the index value IV=3 has a 50% probability of being promoted. If the continuation rate has already reached the maximum, the continuation rate promotion lottery process (step S1707) is not executed.

If the result of the continuation rate promotion lottery process is a winning result (step S1708: YES), the continuation rate update process is executed (step S1709). In the continuation rate update process, the continuation rate information stored in the main-side RAM 74 is updated so that the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is one step higher.

In the first BB process, in addition to the various processes described above, it is determined whether or not game media have been awarded in the current game (step S1710). If game media have been awarded (step S1710: YES), information on the number of game media awarded in the current game is added to the total payout counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1711). Then, when the value of the total payout counter after the addition becomes equal to or greater than the end reference number (for example, "350") (step S1712: YES), the first BB flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1713). This completes the first BB state. In addition, when the first BB flag is cleared to "0", the first BB end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92, and the effect side MPU 92 receiving the first BB end command executes the end effect of the first BB state. The configuration may be such that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 are controlled. Also, "1" is set in the state counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1714). As a result, the post-bonus state process (step S606) is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 22) when the next game ends.

FIG. 36 is a time chart for explaining the progress of the game when the first BB state occurs. 36(a) shows a period in which the game section is an advantageous section, FIG. 36(b) shows a period in which the game state is the normal state ST1, and FIG. 36(c) shows a period in which the game state is the first BB. FIG. 36(d) shows the setting status of the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74, and FIG. 36(e) shows the lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 and promotion lottery process for continuation rate. FIG. 36(f) shows the period when the game state is the post-bonus state ST3, and FIG. 36(g) shows the timing when the game state is the first 36(h) shows the period during which the game state is the second preparation state ST5, and FIG. 36(i) shows the period during which the game state is the RT state ST6. Indicates a period.

First, a case will be described in which, in the case of shifting to the 1BB state in the normal section, the transition winning lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed in the first game of the 1BB state is won.

36(b) and 36(c), the game state changes from the normal state ST1 to the first BB by establishing the first BB winning at the timing of t1, which is the normal state ST1 and the normal section. As shown in FIG. 36(a), the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section. Further, as shown in FIG. 36(e), a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. By winning transition in the transition lottery process, as shown in FIG. is maintained. As a result, the situation is such that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is established in the advantageous section.

After that, at the timing t2 in the middle of the first BB state, if the index value IV=2 or 3 in the BB state ST2 is won, the continuation rate promotion lottery process is executed as shown in FIG. 36(e). When the promotion lottery process results in a winning result, the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 set at the timing of t1 is promoted by one level, and when the promotion lottery process results in a loss, it is set at the timing of t1. The continuation rate of RT state ST6 is maintained.

After that, when the total number of game media awarded in the first BB state becomes equal to or greater than the end reference number at the timing of t3, the game state changes from the first BB state as shown in FIGS. After the bonus, it shifts to state ST3. In this case, the state is shifted to the post-bonus state ST3 in a situation where the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are established in the advantageous section.

Thereafter, the SB winning data is set at the timing of t4 and the SB winning is not established, so that the game state changes from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 36(f) and 36(g). transition to Since the SB winning data is set in the advantageous section, even if the SB winning data is set, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not executed.

Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped according to the notified stop order, and the first promotion replay winning is established, as shown in FIGS. 36(g) and 36(h). As shown, the game state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5. At the timing of t6, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped according to the notified stop order, and the second promotion replay winning is established, as shown in FIGS. 36(h) and 36(i). As shown, the game state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6.

As described above, a transition to the RT state ST6 basically occurs when a winning result is obtained in the lottery process for the transition to the RT state ST6 executed in the first game after shifting to the first BB state. . As a result, the player expects that the first BB state will occur while staying in the normal state ST1, for example, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, if a winning result is obtained in the lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 executed in the first game after shifting to the first BB state, the index value IV=2 or 3 is won in the first BB state. A promotion lottery process for the continuation rate is executed each time, and the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is promoted by one step when a winning result is obtained in the promotion lottery process. As a result, when the player moves to the first BB state, the player expects to win the transition to the RT state ST6 at an early stage, and expects to win the index value IV=2 or 3 in the first BB state. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the first BB state.

Next, a description will be given of a case where the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are not satisfied in the first BB state when the state is shifted to the first BB state in the normal section.

36(b) and 36(c), the game state changes from the normal state ST1 to the first BB by establishing the first BB winning at the timing of t7 which is the normal section and the normal state ST1. As shown in FIG. 36(a), the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section. Further, as shown in FIG. 36(e), a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. As a result of losing in the transfer lottery process, the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 36(d). This results in a situation in which the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not established in the advantageous section.

After that, at the timing of t8 in the middle of the first BB state, if the index value IV=2 or 3 in the BB state ST2 is won, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed again as shown in FIG. 36(e). be done. Also in the shift lottery process, the result is a loss, so that the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is kept set to "1" as shown in FIG. 36(d).

After that, when the total number of game media awarded in the first BB state becomes equal to or greater than the end reference number at the timing t9, the game state changes from the first BB state to the state shown in FIGS. After the bonus, it shifts to state ST3. In this case, the transition to the post-bonus state ST3 is made in the advantageous section and the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 are not satisfied.

After that, the SB winning data is set at the timing of t10 and the SB winning is not established, so that the game state changes from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 36(f) and 36(g). transition to Since the SB winning data is set in the advantageous section, even if the SB winning data is set, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not executed.

After that, at the timing of t11, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first promotion replay winning prize is not notified in spite of the setting of the first promotion replay winning data. will miss the establishment of the first promotion replay prize. As a result, the game state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the normal state ST1 as shown in FIGS. 36(b) and 36(g). In this case, the advantageous interval initialization process is executed, so that the game interval shifts from the advantageous interval to the normal interval as shown in FIG. is cleared to "0".

Next, a case where the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are satisfied in a game after the first game in the first BB state will be described.

36(b) and 36(c), the game state changes from the normal state ST1 to the first BB as shown in FIGS. 36(b) and 36(c). As shown in FIG. 36(a), the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section. Further, as shown in FIG. 36(e), a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. As a result of losing in the transfer lottery process, the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 36(d). This results in a situation in which the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not established in the advantageous section.

After that, at the timing of t13 in the middle of the first BB state, if the index value IV=2 or 3 in the BB state ST2 is won, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed again as shown in FIG. 36(e). be done. By winning the transition in the transition lottery process, the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 36(d). As a result, the situation is such that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is established in the advantageous section. After that, at timings t14 to t17, events similar to those at timings t3 to t6 occur.

As described above, even if the lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 executed in the first game after shifting to the first BB state results in a loss, the index value IV = 2 or 3 is won in the first BB state. As a result, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed again, and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied by the winning result in the transition lottery process. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are satisfied when shifting to the first BB state, and to increase the player's expectation for shifting to the first BB state.

It should be noted that, if a winning result is obtained in the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6, the corresponding effect or notification may be executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, or the image display device 63. It may be configured not to In the case of a configuration in which the effect or notification is executed, the player expects that the effect or notification is executed in the game that transitions to the first BB state, and in the game that transitions to the first BB state. Even if the effect or notification is not executed, the player expects that the effect or notification will be executed every time the index value IV=2 or 3 is won. Further, after the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are met, if the winning result is obtained in the continuous rate promotion lottery process, the corresponding effect or notification is displayed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, or the image display device 63. The configuration may be such that it is executed at the same time, or it may be configured so that it is not executed.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the second BB processing in step S1609 in the BB processing (FIG. 34).

If game media have been awarded in the current game (step S1801: YES), information on the number of game media awarded in the current game is added to the total payout counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1802). . Then, when the value of the total payout counter after the addition becomes equal to or greater than the end reference number (for example, "350") (step S1803: YES), the second BB flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1804). This ends the second BB state. In addition, when the second BB flag is cleared to "0", the second BB end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92, and the effect side MPU 92 receiving the second BB end command executes the end effect of the second BB state. The configuration may be such that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 are controlled. Also, "1" is set in the state counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1805). As a result, the post-bonus state process (step S606) is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 22) when the next game ends.

As described above, in the second BB state, regardless of the result of the combination lottery process, the lottery process for moving to the RT state ST6 and the promotion lottery process for the continuation rate are not executed. The probability that the 2nd BB winning data is set differs among the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6" as already explained. In such a configuration, in the second BB state, by not executing the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 and the promotion lottery process for the continuation rate, RT is triggered by the transition to the second BB state with a set difference in the probability of occurrence. It is possible to prevent the conditions for transition to state ST6 from being satisfied.

FIG. 38 is a time chart for explaining the progress of the game when the second BB state occurs. FIG. 38(a) shows a period in which the game section is an advantageous section, FIG. 38(b) shows a period in which the game state is the normal state ST1, and FIG. 38(c) shows a period in which the game state is the second BB. FIG. 38(d) shows the setting status of the advantageous end preparation flag in the main side RAM 74, and FIG. 38(e) shows the timing at which lottery processing for transition to RT state ST6 is executed. 38(f) shows the period during which the game state is the post-bonus state ST3, FIG. 38(g) shows the period during which the game state is the first preparation state ST4, and FIG. FIG. 38(i) shows the period during which the game state is the second preparation state ST5, and FIG. 38(i) shows the period during which the game state is the RT state ST6.

By establishing the second BB winning at the timing of t1, which is the normal state ST1 and the normal section, the game state changes from the normal state ST1 to the second BB as shown in FIGS. transition to state. However, unlike the case of the first BB state, even if the state shifts to the second BB state, the game section does not shift to the advantageous section and the normal section is maintained. Then, the normal section is maintained until the second BB state ends. Further, as the normal section is maintained, the value of the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is maintained at "0" as shown in FIG. 38(d). In addition, when the transition to the second BB state occurs while the game section is the advantageous section, the advantageous section is maintained without shifting to the normal section.

After that, when the total number of game media awarded in the second BB state becomes equal to or greater than the end reference number at the timing t2, the game state changes from the second BB state as shown in FIGS. After the bonus, it shifts to state ST3. In this case, the situation is the post-bonus state ST3 and the normal section.

As already explained, the post-bonus state ST3 continues until the SB winning data is set and the SB winning is not established. When SB winning data is set at timing t3 and SB winning is not established, the game state shifts from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 38(f) and 38(g). At the same time, as shown in FIG. 38(a), the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section. Also, at the timing of t3, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed as shown in FIG. 38(e). The transition lottery process is executed in the first preparation state ST4. The table for various states (FIG. 21(c)) is referred to, so that the winning result is surely obtained. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38(d), the state in which the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "0" is maintained. As a result, the situation is such that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is established in the advantageous section.

Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped according to the notified stop order, and the first promotion replay winning is established, as shown in FIGS. 38(g) and 38(h). As shown, the game state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5. Also, at the timing of t5, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped according to the notified stop order, and the second promotion replay winning is established, as shown in FIGS. 38(h) and 38(i). As shown, the game state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6.

As described above, when the state of the normal section is shifted to the second BB state, the state of the normal section is maintained until the second BB state ends and the state shifts to the post-bonus state ST3. The post-bonus state ST3 continues at least until the SB winning data is set, and when the SB winning data is set in the normal section, the table for various states (Fig. 21(c) )), and the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is executed. As a result, when the second BB state occurs in the normal section, it is possible to ensure that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is met with the subsequent setting of the SB winning data as a trigger. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of the second BB state.

Next, a processing configuration for controlling the end of the advantageous section will be described.

As already explained, in step S1409 in the game section control process (FIG. 31), it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", thereby determining whether the game section is the advantageous section. determine whether If it is an advantageous section (step S1409: YES), first, 1 is added to the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1416). The number-of-advantage-games counter 74b is a counter for measuring the number of games played continuously in a situation where the game interval is an advantageous interval. Even if this occurs, the value of the number-of-advantage-games counter 74b is not cleared and the measurement is maintained. In addition, the process of step S1416 is not performed in the control process of the game area in the process time when the process of step S1404 was performed. After that, the end processing of the advantageous section is executed (step S1417).

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the end processing of the advantageous section. As described above, the game section control process is executed when the game ends, so the advantageous section end process is also executed when the game ends.

First, it is determined whether or not the condition for shifting to the normal state ST1 is satisfied in the current game (step S1901). Specifically, when the first promotion replay winning data is set in the first preparation state ST4 but the first promotion replay winning is not established, it is determined that the conditions for shifting to the normal state ST1 are established. . Also, in the second preparation state ST5, when the second promotion replay prize winning is not established even though the second promotion replay winning data is set, it is determined that the condition for shifting to the normal state ST1 is established.

When the condition for shifting to the normal state ST1 is satisfied in the current game (step S1901: YES), the advantageous section initialization process is executed (step S1902). In the advantageous section initialization process, various information relating to the advantageous section stored in the main RAM 74 is initialized. Specifically, the advantageous section flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0", the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0", and the continuation rate information of the RT state ST6 is also erased. As a result, the game section shifts to the normal section. In other words, the state is the normal state ST1 and the normal section. After that, extinguishing processing for extinguishing the advantageous section display section 67 is executed (step S1903). As a result, when the advantageous interval ends and the normal interval starts, the advantageous interval display part 67 is turned off, and by visually confirming the advantageous interval display part 67, the manager of the game hall or the like is in the advantageous interval. It is possible to grasp whether or not

Even in the normal state ST1 and the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (steps S1904 and S1905: YES), the advantageous section initialization process is executed (step S1906). , extinguishing processing of the advantageous section display section 67 is executed (step S1907). The processing contents of steps S1906 and S1907 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1902 and S1903.

A situation in which an affirmative determination is made in both steps S1904 and S1905 is a situation in which the normal state ST1 is in the normal section, and the remaining number of games up to the normal side upper limit number of games in the normal state ST1 exceeds 50 games. This is a case where the SB winning data is set in a situation where the player moves to an advantageous section as a trigger. In this case, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the first game after shifting to the advantageous section, and the transition lottery process refers to the first table for the normal state (FIG. 21(a)). Since it is executed, the result of the transfer lottery process is surely a wrong result. Then, when the outcome is a loss, the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". In this configuration, if the determinations in both steps S1904 and S1905 are affirmative, the initialization process for the advantageous section is executed. In the state ST1, when the number of games remaining until the normal side upper limit number of games exceeds 50 games, when the SB winning data is set as a trigger to shift to the advantageous section, the first player who has shifted to the advantageous section It is possible to end the advantageous section in the game.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps S1901, S1904 and S1905, 1 is added to the value of the continuous game number counter in the main RAM 74 (step S1908). After that, it is determined whether or not the second promotion replay winning has been established in the current game (step S1909). If the second promotion replay winning has not been established (step S1909: NO), the value of the continuous game number counter in the main side RAM 74 becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the advantageous section. (step S1910). If the value is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games, it means that the number of games continued without transitioning to the normal section in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games, so the advantageous section initialization processing is executed. (Step S1911), extinguishing processing of the advantageous section display section 67 is executed (Step S1912). The processing contents of these steps S1911 and S1912 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1902 and S1903.

On the other hand, if the second promotion replay winning has been established in the current game (step S1909: YES), it means that the gaming state has shifted from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6 in the current game. In this case, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-continued-games counter in the main RAM 74 is greater than or equal to the number of opportunity games (specifically, 1450 games) (step S1913). If the number of games is equal to or greater than the value of the number of opportunity games, a new transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in a situation where the number of games continued without transitioning to the normal section in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of opportunity games. Therefore, the advantageous section initialization process is executed (step S1911), and the advantageous section display section 67 is turned off (step S1912). The processing contents of these steps S1911 and S1912 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1902 and S1903.

How the advantageous interval is forcibly ended in relation to the number of games continued in the advantageous interval will be described below. First, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 40, how the advantageous interval is forcibly ended when the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games will be described. FIG. 40(a) shows the period when the game section is the advantageous section, FIG. 40(b) shows the timing when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, and FIG. 40(c) shows the SB winning. FIG. 40(d) shows the timing when the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed, and FIG. 40(e) shows the period during which the game state is the normal state ST1. 40(f) shows the period in which the game state is the first BB state, FIG. 40(g) shows the period in which the game state is the post-bonus state ST3, and FIG. 40(h) shows the game state. indicates the period in which the game state is in the first preparation state ST4, and FIG. 40(i) indicates the period in which the game state is in the second preparation state ST5.

First, the case where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the maximum number of games during the first BB state will be described. At timing t1, which is the first BB state and the advantageous interval, the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, as shown in FIG. 40(b). In this case, the advantageous interval initialization process is executed even in the middle of the first BB state, so that the game interval shifts from the advantageous interval to the normal interval as shown in FIG. 40(a). In the first BB state, if the index value IV=2 or 3 is won in the advantageous section, the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 or promotion lottery process for the continuation rate is executed, but in the case of the normal section Even if a lottery is won with the index value IV=2 or 3, the lottery process for moving to the RT state ST6 and the lottery process for increasing the continuation rate are not executed.

When the game section shifts to the normal section in the middle of the first BB state, the normal section continues until the end of the first BB state. After that, when the condition for ending the first BB state is established at the timing t2, the game state shifts from the first BB state to the post-bonus state ST3 as shown in FIGS. 40(f) and 40(g). The post-bonus state ST3 continues at least until SB winning data is set. Then, at the timing of t3, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 40(c) and the SB winning is not established, so that the game state changes to bonus as shown in FIGS. 40(g) and 40(h). The post-state ST3 is shifted to the first preparation state ST4. Also, at the timing of t3, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 40(a). After that, at timing t4, which is the timing at which the first game is started in the advantageous section, as shown in FIG. In the shift lottery process, the table for various states (FIG. 21(c)) is referred to, so that the lottery result is surely obtained. Therefore, it is in the advantageous section and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is established.

As described above, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the maximum number of games during the first BB state and a shift to the normal section occurs, after the end of the first BB state, the normal section is the post-bonus state. The situation becomes ST3. The post-bonus state ST3 continues at least until the SB winning data is set, and when the SB winning data is set, the table for various states (FIG. 21(c)) is referred to and the state goes to RT state ST6. Since the transfer lottery process of is executed, the winning result is surely obtained. Therefore, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games during the first BB state, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is established after the end of the first BB state. The player expects that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section will reach the upper limit number of games.

When the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games during the second BB state, the second BB is performed in the same manner as when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games during the first BB state. After the state ends, the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 are satisfied.

Next, a case where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games during the post-bonus state ST3 will be described. At timing t5, which is the post-bonus state ST3 and the advantageous interval, the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, as shown in FIG. 40(b). In this case, the advantageous interval initialization process is executed even during the post-bonus state ST3, so that the game interval shifts from the advantageous interval to the normal interval as shown in FIG. 40(a).

The post-bonus state ST3, which is the normal section, continues at least until the SB winning data is set. At the timing of t6, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 40(c) and the SB winning is not established, so that the game state changes to bonus as shown in FIGS. 40(g) and 40(h). The post-state ST3 is shifted to the first preparation state ST4. Also, at the timing of t6, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 40(a). After that, at the timing t7 when the first game is started in the advantageous section, a lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is executed as shown in FIG. 40(d). In the shift lottery process, the table for various states (FIG. 21(c)) is referred to, so that the lottery result is surely obtained. Therefore, it is in the advantageous section and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is established.

As described above, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the maximum number of games during the post-bonus state ST3 and a transition to the normal section occurs, the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3. With reference to the table for various states (FIG. 21(c)), the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed, and the winning result is assured. Therefore, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games during the post-bonus state ST3, the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are satisfied. The player expects that the number of continuous games will reach the upper limit number of games.

Next, the case where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games during the first preparation state ST4 will be described.

At timing t8, which is the first preparation state ST4 and the advantageous interval, the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, as shown in FIG. 40(b). In this case, the advantageous interval initialization process is executed even during the first preparation state ST4, so that the game interval shifts from the advantageous interval to the normal interval as shown in FIG. 40(a). After that, the first promotion replay winning data is set before the SB winning data is set. In this case, since the game section is the normal section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for establishing the first promotion replay winning prize is not reported. Therefore, at the timing of t9, although the first promotion replay winning data is set, an event occurs in which the first promotion replay winning is not established, and the gaming state changes as shown in FIGS. 40(e) and 40(h). The first preparation state ST4 is shifted to the normal state ST1.

On the other hand, if the SB winning data is set before the first promotion replay winning data is set after the normal section and the first preparation state ST4, the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are met. It will be established. This case will be explained.

At timing t10, which is the first preparation state ST4 and the advantageous interval, the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, as shown in FIG. 40(b). In this case, the advantageous interval initialization process is executed even during the first preparation state ST4, so that the game interval shifts from the advantageous interval to the normal interval as shown in FIG. 40(a). After that, at the timing of t11, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 40(c), and the SB winning is not established. As a result, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 40(a) while the first preparation state ST4 is maintained as shown in FIG. 40(h). After that, as shown in FIG. 40(d), the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is executed at the timing t12, which is the timing at which the first game is started in the advantageous section. In the shift lottery process, the table for various states (FIG. 21(c)) is referred to, so that the lottery result is surely obtained. Therefore, it is in the advantageous section and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for establishing the first promotion replay winning prize is notified. Therefore, when the first promotion replay winning data is set at the timing of t13, basically the first promotion replay winning prize is established, so the gaming state is changed as shown in FIGS. It shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5.

As described above, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games during the first preparation state ST4 and a shift to the normal section occurs, the first promotion replay winning data is set. By setting the SB winning data in , the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the table for various states (FIG. 21(c)), and the winning result is surely obtained. Therefore, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games during the first preparation state ST4, the SB winning data is set before the first promotion replay winning data is set. The player expects it, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the image display device 63 executes an effect or notification for allowing the player to recognize whether the game section is the normal section or the advantageous section, thereby enabling the first preparation. In the middle of state ST4, the player can grasp that the advantageous section has ended and the normal section has started. By letting the player know that it is in the normal section and in the first preparation state ST4, the SB winning data is set before the first promotion replay winning data is set. The game is played in the first preparation state ST4 while expecting. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first preparation state ST4.

Next, the case where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games during the second preparatory state ST5 will be described.

At the timing of t14, which is the second preparation state ST5 and the advantageous interval, the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, as shown in FIG. 40(b). In this case, the advantageous interval initialization process is executed even during the second preparation state ST5, so that the game interval shifts from the advantageous interval to the normal interval as shown in FIG. 40(a). After that, the second promotion replay winning data is set before the SB winning data is set. In this case, since the game section is the normal section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for establishing the second promotion replay winning prize is not notified. Therefore, at the timing of t15, although the second promotion replay winning data is set, an event occurs in which the second promotion replay winning is not established, and the gaming state changes as shown in FIGS. It shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the normal state ST1.

On the other hand, if the SB winning data is set before the second promotion replay winning data is set after the normal section is in the second preparation state ST5, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. It will be established. This case will be explained.

At the timing of t16, which is the second preparatory state ST5 and the advantageous interval, the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, as shown in FIG. 40(b). In this case, the advantageous interval initialization process is executed even during the second preparation state ST5, so that the game interval shifts from the advantageous interval to the normal interval as shown in FIG. 40(a). After that, at the timing of t17, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 40(c), and the SB winning is not established. As a result, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 40(a) while the second preparation state ST5 is maintained as shown in FIG. 40(i). After that, as shown in FIG. 40(d), at the timing t18, which is the timing at which the first game is started in the advantageous section, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. In the shift lottery process, the table for various states (FIG. 21(c)) is referred to, so that the lottery result is surely obtained. Therefore, it is in the advantageous section and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is established. In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for establishing the second promotion replay winning prize is notified. Therefore, when the second promotion replay winning data is set at the timing of t19, the second promotion replay winning is basically established, so the game state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6.

As described above, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games during the second preparation state ST5 and the transition to the normal section occurs, before the second promotion replay winning data is set By setting the SB winning data in , the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the table for various states (FIG. 21(c)), and the winning result is surely obtained. Therefore, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games during the second preparation state ST5, the SB winning data is set before the second promotion replay winning data is set. The player expects it, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the image display device 63 executes an effect or notification for allowing the player to recognize whether the game section is the normal section or the advantageous section, so that the second preparation is performed. The player can grasp that the advantageous section has ended and the normal section has started in the middle of the state ST5. By letting the player know that the player is in the second preparation state ST5 and in the normal section, the SB winning data is set before the second promotion replay winning data is set. The player will play the game in the second preparation state ST5 with anticipation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the second preparation state ST5.

Next, referring to the time chart of FIG. 41, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is greater than or equal to the number of opportunity games, the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs, and the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. I will explain how it works. FIG. 41(a) shows the period when the game section is the advantageous section, FIG. 41(b) shows the timing when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the number of opportunity games, and FIG. 41(c) shows the SB win. FIG. 41(d) shows the timing when the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed, and FIG. 41(e) shows the period during which the game state is the RT state ST6. 40(f) shows the period during which the game state is the first preparation state ST4, FIG. 40(g) shows the period during which the game state is the second preparation state ST5, and FIG. 40(h). indicates the period during which the game state is the normal state ST1.

First, the case where the SB winning data is set in the normal section and in the RT state ST6 will be described.

At timing t1, which is the second preparation state ST5 and the advantageous interval, the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval reaches the number of opportunity games as shown in FIG. 40(b). However, even if the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval reaches the number of opportunity games, the game interval is maintained in the advantageous interval as shown in FIG. 40(a). After that, the second promotion replay winning is established at the timing of t2 in which the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or more than the number of trigger games and is less than the upper limit number of games. ), the game state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6. In this case, since the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is greater than or equal to the number of trigger games, the game section becomes the advantageous section at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. to the normal section.

After that, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 41(c) at the timing of t3, which is the RT state ST6 and is the normal section, so that the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 41(a) at the timing of t3. As shown, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section. After that, at timing t4, which is the timing at which the first game is started in the advantageous section, as shown in FIG. In the shift lottery process, the RT state table (FIG. 21(d)) is referred to, so that the winning result is assured and 100% is selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. Therefore, basically, the state in which the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is maintained until the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the number of trigger games or the upper limit number of games. Therefore, even if the RT state ST6 once ends at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 41(d), the first preparation state ST4 is maintained as shown in FIG. The second preparation state ST5 is performed as shown in FIG. 41(g) from the timing t6 to the timing t7, and at the timing t7, as shown in FIG. 41(e), the RT state ST6 is entered again. It will be done.

Next, the case where the SB winning data is not set in the RT state ST6 and in the normal section will be described.

At timing t8, which is the second preparation state ST5 and the advantageous interval, the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval reaches the number of opportunity games as shown in FIG. 40(b). However, even if the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval reaches the number of opportunity games, the game interval is maintained in the advantageous interval as shown in FIG. 40(a). After that, the second promotion replay winning is established at the timing of t9, which is the situation in which the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or more than the number of trigger games and is less than the upper limit number of games. ), the game state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6. In this case, since the transition to the RT state ST6 is made in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of opportunity games, the game section becomes the advantageous section at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. to the normal section.

After that, the RT state ST6 ends as shown in FIG. As shown, it shifts to the first preparation state ST4. In this case, the state is the first preparation state ST4 and the normal section. Then, the first promotion replay winning data is set before the SB winning data is set. In this case, since the game section is the normal section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for establishing the first promotion replay winning prize is not reported. Therefore, at the timing of t11, although the first promotion replay winning data is set, an event occurs in which the first promotion replay winning is not established, and the gaming state changes as shown in FIGS. 41(f) and 41(h). The state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the normal state ST1.

As described above, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is greater than or equal to the number of trigger games and less than the upper limit number of games, when the RT state ST6 is entered, the state is the RT state ST6 and the normal section. Then, when the SB winning data is set in the middle of the RT state ST6, the table for the RT state (FIG. 21(d)) is referred to during the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6, and the RT state ST6 is entered. not only is the transition condition of (1) surely satisfied, but the maximum continuation rate of 100% is selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. As a result, the player expects the transition to the RT state ST6 in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of the opportunity games, and the game player expects that the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6. people will expect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Regarding game history management>
Next, the management processing executed by the main MPU 72 for managing the game history and notifying the management result will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Note that the management process is executed at step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, the value of the total game number counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is grasped (step S2001), and the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is grasped (step S2002). Then, the ratio of the value of the number-of-advantage-games counter 74b to the value of the number-of-total-games counter 74a is calculated (step S2003). That is, the calculation is executed so that the calculation result=“value of number-of-advantage-games counter 74b”/“value of number-of-total-games counter 74a”. Then, of the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100, the 100 digit is displayed on the first notification display device 85, the 10 digit is displayed on the second notification display device 86, and the 1 digit is displayed on the second notification display device 86. These first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 are controlled to be displayed on the third notification display device 87 without using other control devices (step S2004). The above calculation result is reported as a percentage display. Specifically, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "35", "0" is displayed on the first notification display device 85 and "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 86. , and the third notification display device 87 displays "5". Further, for example, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "100", "1" is displayed on the first notification display device 85, "0" is displayed on the second notification display device 86, and "0" is displayed on the second notification display device 86. "0" is displayed on the display device 87 for 3 information.

By executing the management process as described above, the management result of the game history is always displayed on the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87, and the manager of the game hall can is opened and the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 are viewed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history. In addition, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is executed in a cycle shorter than the shortest period required to complete one game, and more specifically, the shortest period required from the end of one game to the start of the next game. It is executed in a cycle shorter than the period. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can grasp the management result of the game history up to the last completed game by viewing the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 .

Next, the flowchart of FIG. 43 is used for the lighting processing for executing the light emission control of the lighting devices 88a and 88b provided for the purpose of irradiating the main control device 70 with light when the front door 12 is in an open state. Description will be made with reference to this. The lighting process is executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

If light is not emitted from the lighting devices 88a and 88b (step S2101: NO), it is determined whether or not the front door 12 is open based on the state of the signal input from the open angle sensor 89. (Step S2102). If the front door 12 is open (step S2102: YES), it is determined whether or not the opening angle of the front door 12 is within a predetermined angle range (step S2103). Specifically, based on the state of the signal input from the open angle sensor 89, it is determined whether or not the open angle of the front door 12 exceeds a predetermined open angle. This predetermined opening angle is set as an angle that is 86% of the maximum opening angle of the front door 12 . Specifically, the maximum opening angle of the front door 12 is when the front door 12 is opened at 90° with respect to the housing 11, so the predetermined state is when the front door 12 is opened at about 77° with respect to the housing 11. is set to an opening angle of If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, that is, if the front door 12 is not closed and the opening angle of the front door 12 is 77° or less, a driving signal is output to the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b (step S2104). As a result, the irradiation range IR including the main controller 70 is irradiated with light from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b. This light irradiation state continues until the process of step S2106, which will be described later, is executed.

When light is emitted from the lighting devices 88a and 88b (step S2101: YES), based on the state of the signal input from the open angle sensor 89, the front door 12 is closed or the front door 12 is open. It is determined whether the open angle exceeds a predetermined open angle (step S2105). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, output of drive signals to the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b is stopped (step S2106). As a result, the pair of illumination devices 88a and 88b are put into a non-illumination state, and the irradiation of light from the pair of illumination devices 88a and 88b to the irradiation range IR is stopped.

Here, the relationship between the opening angle of the front door 12 and the control state of the lighting devices 88a and 88b will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 44(a) and 44(b). FIG. 44(a) shows the state of the front door 12, and FIG. 44(b) shows the control state of the lighting devices 88a and 88b. Also, in the following description, FIG. 45(a) and FIG. 45(b) will be referred to as needed. FIG. 45(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the illumination devices 88a and 88b when the front door 12 is in an open state and the opening angle is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle. ) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the illumination devices 88a and 88b when the opening angle of the front door 12 is a maximum opening angle exceeding a predetermined opening angle.

First, the case where the opening operation of the front door 12 is stopped in a situation where the opening angle of the front door 12 is equal to or less than the predetermined opening angle will be described.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the opening operation of the front door 12 is started at the timing t1. In this case, the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b start emitting light at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 44(b). After that, at timing t2, the opening operation of the front door 12 is stopped before the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds the predetermined opening angle. In this state, light is emitted from the pair of illumination devices 88a and 88b toward the main controller 70 as shown in FIG. 45(a). As a result, even when the front door 12 is slightly opened, the main controller 70 is brightly illuminated, so that the manager of the game hall can use the board box 81 of the main controller 70 and the first to third notifications. It is possible to visually confirm the display contents of the display devices 85 to 87 for the user. In this case, since it is not necessary to open the front door 12 to the end during the confirmation work, the confirmation work can be facilitated.

After that, as shown in FIG. 44(a), the closing operation of the front door 12 is started at the timing t3, and the front door 12 is closed at the timing t4. In this case, the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b is stopped at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 44(b).

Next, a case will be described in which the opening operation of the front door 12 is performed until the opening angle of the front door 12 reaches the maximum opening angle.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the opening operation of the front door 12 is started at the timing of t5. In this case, at the timing t5, the pair of illumination devices 88a and 88b start emitting light as shown in FIG. 44(b). After that, at the timing of t6, the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds the predetermined opening angle as shown in FIG. 44(a). As a result, the irradiation of light from the pair of illumination devices 88a and 88b is stopped at the timing t6 as shown in FIG. 44(b).

After that, at timing t7, the opening operation of the front door 12 is stopped in a state where the opening angle of the front door 12 reaches the maximum opening angle. In this state, as shown in FIG. 45(b), the pair of illumination devices 88a and 88b do not irradiate the main controller 70 with light. When the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds a predetermined opening angle as in the case where the opening angle of the front door 12 reaches the maximum opening angle, the inside of the housing 11 is illuminated by the light of the in-store lighting of the game hall or the sunlight. . In this case, if the main control device 70 is illuminated by the illumination devices 88a and 88b, the visibility of the main control device 70 and the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 may be lowered. be done. On the other hand, when the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds the predetermined opening angle, such inconvenience occurs by stopping the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b. It is possible to prevent

After that, as shown in FIG. 44(a), the closing operation of the front door 12 is started at the timing t8, and the opening angle of the front door 12 becomes equal to or less than the predetermined opening angle at the timing t9. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44(b), light irradiation from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b is started at the timing t9. After that, as shown in FIG. 44(a), the front door 12 is closed at the timing t10. In this case, at the timing t10, the light irradiation from the pair of illumination devices 88a and 88b is stopped as shown in FIG. 44(b).

Since the illumination devices 88a and 88b for illuminating the main controller 70 are provided, it becomes easier to perform the confirmation work of the main controller 70 by opening the front door 12. FIG. In this case, when the front door 12 is closed, the illumination devices 88a and 88b are in a non-illumination state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the illumination devices 88a and 88b from being in an unnecessarily illuminated state when the confirmation of the main controller 70 is not performed. Further, when the front door 12 is opened, the illumination devices 88a and 88b are automatically illuminated. As a result, it is not necessary to separately perform an operation to bring the lighting devices 88a and 88b into the lighting state, so that the confirmation work of the main controller 70 can be easily performed.

The illumination devices 88a and 88b are provided inside the housing 11 in which the main controller 70 is provided. This makes it easier to illuminate the main controller 70 by the illumination devices 88a and 88b in response to the opening operation of the front door 12. FIG.

The illumination devices 88a and 88b are not illuminated even when the front door 12 is placed in any open position, but the illumination devices 88a and 88b are selectively illuminated in some open positions. state. As a result, the lighting devices 88a and 88b are set to the lighting state only in favorable conditions when confirming the main control device 70, and if the lighting devices 88a and 88b are set to the lighting state, it is rather difficult to check the main control device 70. The illumination devices 88a and 88b can be placed in a non-illuminated state.

When the front door 12 is in the maximum open position, the illumination devices 88a, 88b are in a non-illumination state. As a result, when the main controller 70 is sufficiently brightly illuminated by the lighting of the game hall, the lighting devices 88a and 88b are in a non-illuminated state, so that the lighting by the lighting devices 88a and 88b rather than the main controller 70 It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of making it difficult to confirm.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A plurality of types of game states ST1 to ST6 are present, and a plurality of types of game intervals are present aside from them, thereby making it possible to diversify the progress of the game. In addition, the advantageous section is a section in which the transition to the RT state ST6 is more likely to occur than the normal section, and both the normal section and the advantageous section can stay in each of a plurality of types of game states ST1 to ST6. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting to be in an advantageous game state and in an advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

When the second promotion replay winning is established in the second preparation state ST5, the state shifts to the RT state ST6. It is not performed in the normal section but in the advantageous section. Therefore, the RT state ST6 is basically an advantageous section. However, a situation may occur in which the RT state ST6 becomes a normal section due to the number of games continued in the advantageous section. In this case, when the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 and the normal section, the state is shifted to the RT state ST6 and the advantageous section, and the table for the RT state is referred to. A lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. Then, when the lottery process for transitioning to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the table for the RT state, the transition to the RT state ST6 is surely won, and the most advantageous continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is 100%. Persistence is selected. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting that the RT state ST6 and the normal section will occur, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

As described above, when the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 and in the normal section, the table for the RT state is referred to and the lottery process for moving to the RT state ST6 is executed. At the same time, the transition to RT state ST6 is won, and the most advantageous continuation rate of 100% is selected as the continuation rate of RT state ST6. In this case, if the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section is greater than or equal to the number of trigger games, and the second promotion replay prize is established and the transition to RT state ST6 occurs, the game continues in the advantageous section. Even if the number of games executed as a result does not reach the upper limit number of games, the RT state ST6 is present from the start of the RT state ST6, which is the normal section. As a result, it is possible to provide many opportunities for the SB winning data to be set in the RT state ST6 and in the normal section.

When the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the game section becomes an advantageous section, and when the first BB prize is established in the advantageous section, the game section is maintained as the advantageous section. That is, in the first BB state, the game section is basically the advantageous section. The advantageous section is maintained in the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5 after the end of the first BB state, and any of these game states ST3 to ST5 is the advantageous section. Even if the SB winning data is set in , the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not executed. On the other hand, when the number of games continued in the advantageous section during the first BB state reaches the upper limit number of games, the state is the first BB state and the normal section, and the subsequent post-bonus state ST3. Regular intervals are maintained. Further, when the number of games continued in the advantageous section during the post-bonus state ST3 reaches the upper limit number of games, the state becomes the post-bonus state ST3 and the normal section. Then, when the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 and the normal section, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the RT state ST6 is entered by referring to the table for various states. is executed. When the lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the tables for various states, the transition to RT state ST6 is won with certainty. As a result, the player plays the game expecting the occurrence of a normal section in either the first BB state or the post-bonus state ST3, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game. .

If the lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 is executed in the first BB state and in the advantageous section, there is a possibility that the transition to RT state ST6 will not be won. On the other hand, if the first BB state is the normal section, the post-bonus state ST3 after the end of the first BB state is the normal section. In order to shift the game state from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4, it is necessary to set the SB winning data, and when the SB winning data is set, the game section shifts to the advantageous section. At the same time, by referring to the tables for various states, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed, and the winning of the shift to the RT state ST6 is ensured. As a result, even if the state of the normal section or the state of the advantageous section in the 1BB state, it is possible to win the transition to the RT state ST6, while the situation is the normal section in the 1BB state. It is possible to increase the degree of advantage for

When the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, the initial stage of the advantageous section is established regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are established, and regardless of the current game states ST1 to ST6. Transformation processing is executed, and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not established, and the game section becomes the normal section. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous section from continuing excessively. On the other hand, it is unfortunate for players who desire to continue the advantageous interval that the number of games in which the advantageous interval is continued reaches the upper limit number of games. On the other hand, in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of opportunity games, if the establishment of the second promotion replay winning occurs, the RT state ST6 and the normal section will be established. will be in a state where it is easy for profits to be given to Also, as described above, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the first BB state or the post-bonus state ST3, each of these gaming states is in a normal section, and the player does not receive a profit. It will be in a state where it is easy to be granted. As a result, even if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section approaches the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from being lowered.

When the SB winning data is set in the normal section or the first BB winning is established, not only is the advantageous section set, but also the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the setting of the SB winning data or the establishment of the first BB winning in the normal section.

The lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed in the game in which the SB winning data is set or in the game included in the advantageous section after the game in which the first BB winning has been established. As a result, the normal section is a section in which the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is not executed, and the advantageous section is a section in which the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 can be executed. It is possible to make it clear.

The lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed in a mode corresponding to the game states ST1 to ST6 at that point in the game included in the advantageous section, which is a game subsequent to the game in which the SB winning data is set. As a result, the player pays attention not only to the SB winning data being set in the normal section, but also to the types of game states ST1 to ST6 in the subsequent advantageous section.

When the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 and the SB winning is not established, the game state shifts from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4. That is, the game state when the SB winning data is set in the normal section, and the game state when the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed in the advantageous section shifted based on the setting of the SB winning data. It can be different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the combination of the setting mode of the game section and the transition mode of the game state.

When the number of remaining games up to the normal side upper limit number of games in the normal state ST1 exceeds 50 games, the SB winning data is set and based on the shift to the advantageous section, lottery processing for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. In this case, referring to the first table for the normal state does not result in a transition to the RT state ST6. As a result, even if the SB winning data is set in the normal section and the game shifts to the advantageous section, it is possible to create a situation in which the transition to the RT state ST6 does not result in winning.

When a transition from a normal section to an advantageous section occurs, a lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is executed in the first game of the advantageous section. As a result, when the advantageous section is set, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 can be executed early.

Depending on the result of the lottery process for transitioning to the RT state ST6, the conditions for ending the advantageous section will differ. For example, when the lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 is executed in normal state ST1, if the transition to RT state ST6 is won, it is possible to transition again to normal state ST1 after normal state ST1 is completed, or it is advantageous. Until the number of continuous games in the section reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section is continued, but if the transition to the RT state ST6 is not won, the game in which the lottery process for the transition to the RT state ST6 is executed. The advantageous section ends at . Thereby, it is possible to associate the result of the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 and the mode of continuation of the advantageous section.

In the normal state ST1, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed by setting the advantageous section, and when the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is not won in the transition lottery process, the game in which the transition lottery process is executed. The advantageous section ends at . As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from continuing unnecessarily long in a situation where the advantage of being an advantageous section cannot be enjoyed because the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 are not satisfied. becomes.

In the post-bonus state ST3, transition to the first preparation state ST4 occurs on condition that SB winning data is set, and SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 in the normal section. , a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to tables for various states, so that a shift to the RT state ST6 is surely won. That is, when the post-bonus state ST3 is in the normal section, the probability that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is met increases. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the post-bonus state ST3 and the normal section.

When the second BB state occurs in the normal section, after the end of the second BB state, the state is the post-bonus state ST3, which is the normal section. As a result, when the second BB state is entered, not only is the profit from the BB state ST2 given to the player, but also the post-bonus state ST3 and the normal section after the second BB state ends. , the probability that the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 is met increases. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of the second BB state.

When the first BB state occurs in the normal section, the advantageous section is set at the start of the first BB state, so after the end of the first BB state, the state is the post-bonus state ST3 and the advantageous section. Even if the SB winning data is set in the advantageous section, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not executed. As a result, it is possible to differentiate the player's advantage after the BB state ST2 ends between the first BB state and the second BB state.

On the other hand, when the second BB state occurs in the normal section, it is not set as an advantageous section, so the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is not executed in the second BB state, whereas the first BB state occurs in the normal section. In this case, since the advantageous section is set, the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is executed in the first BB state. As a result, even when the first BB state occurs, it is possible to give an opportunity to execute the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6.

There are multiple types of end triggers for the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the advantageous section ends, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the remaining number of games up to the normal side upper limit number of games in the normal state ST1 is 50 games or less, the SB winning data is set and the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed based on the shift to the advantageous section. , the second table for the normal state is referred to, so that the transition to the RT state ST6 is won. Then, in the normal state ST1, when the transfer to the RT state ST6 is won and the conditions for the transfer to the RT state ST6 are established, the state is transferred to the first preparation state ST4 after that, and the establishment of the first promoted replay prize is made possible. The advantageous section is reliably continued until the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from ending without notifying the stopping order as described above even though the conditions for transitioning to the RT state ST6 are satisfied. .

Even in an advantageous section, when the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", the stopping order and the second promotion of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable establishment of the first promotion replay winning prize The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of a replay prize is not reported. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the notification of the stop order as described above is not executed even in an advantageous section, and it is possible to suitably control the game section.

If the transfer to RT state ST6 is not won in the lottery process, the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" while maintaining the advantageous section. By maintaining the advantageous section in this way, it becomes possible to prevent the execution of the lottery process for transitioning to the RT state ST6 with respect to the subsequent setting of the SB winning data, and at the same time as described above in the advantageous section. It is possible to prevent the notification of the stop order from being executed. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the end of the advantageous section without transitioning to the RT state ST6 when no winning is made to transition to the RT state ST6.

When the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the state is the first BB state and the advantageous section. Then, if the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed for the setting of the advantageous section does not result in winning, the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". The state in which the advantageous end preparation flag is set to "1" in this advantageous section is maintained in the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4 and the second preparation state ST5 after the end of the first BB state. As a result, although the lottery process for transitioning to the RT state ST6 has already been executed in response to the occurrence of the first BB state, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the post-bonus state ST3 after the first BB state ends. It is possible to prevent the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 from being executed again in the second preparation state ST5.

If the transition to the first BB state occurs while the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in the advantageous section, the normal state of the game section will continue even if the transition to the first BB state occurs. Since the transition from the section to the advantageous section does not occur, the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 triggered by the transition to the first BB state is not executed. As a result, even if a transition to the first BB state occurs, it is possible to create a situation in which the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is not executed.

When the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the state is the first BB state and the advantageous section. Then, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed based on the fact that the advantageous section has been set. As a result, when the first BB state occurs in the normal section, not only the profit from the BB state ST2 is given to the player, but also the profit of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is given to the player. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of the first BB state, and to improve the interest in the game.

When the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the game section is set to the advantageous section at the start of the first BB state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the timing at which the first BB state is started.

In the first BB state and in the advantageous section, if the player wins with the index value IV=2 or 3 in the BB state ST2, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. This makes it possible to increase the attention of the player not only at the start of the first BB state, but also after the start.

Transition to RT state ST6 executed when 1BB state is started Transition to RT state ST6 in the lottery process. On the condition that no winning is made, transition to RT state ST6 in the middle of 1BB state. Lottery processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 from being met redundantly.

If the lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 executed when the first BB state is started indicates that the transition to RT state ST6 is won, the index value IV in BB state ST2 in the first BB state is 2. Alternatively, the continuation rate promotion lottery process is executed with the winning in 3 as a trigger. As a result, even if the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied when the first BB state is started, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the game during the first BB state.

The game section is set to the advantageous section based on the setting of the SB winning data in the state where the game section is the normal section, and the game state is changed to the first state based on the setting of the SB winning data in the post-bonus state ST3. It shifts to the preparation state ST4. By sharing the game interval transition condition and the game state transition condition as the setting of the SB winning data in this way, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the setting of the SB winning data.

When the SB winning data is set, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section irrespective of whether or not the SB winning is established, whereas the SB winning data is set and the SB winning is established. If not, the game state shifts from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4. As a result, there is a situation in which the post-bonus state ST3 shifts to the first preparation state ST4 at the same time as the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, and a situation in which the post-bonus state ST3 is maintained although the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section occurs. can be generated, and it is possible to diversify transition situations of combinations of game sections and game states.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the player can select whether or not to delay the transition timing from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6. A configuration for enabling delay of the transition timing will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining combinations of winning data and point values PV set for index values IV=7 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5.

As shown in FIG. 46, in the lottery table in the second preparation state ST5 in this embodiment, only the normal replay winning data is set for the index value IV=7 as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the index values IV=8 to 13 are set with not only normal replay winning data and second promotion replay winning data but also continuous replay winning data. Continuous replay winning data is winning data that enables establishment of continuous replay winning. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the continuous replay winning is established. . When the continuous replay winning is established, a replay privilege is given. In addition, in the second preparation state ST5, if the normal replay prize is established in spite of winning with any of the index values IV=8 to 13, the game state is changed to the second preparation state as in the first embodiment. From ST5, the game shifts to the normal state ST1. However, if the player wins with any of the index values IV=8 to 13 and the continuous replay prize is established, the second preparation state ST5 is continued.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the winning mode established when winning is won with index values IV=8 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5. When winning with index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. 47, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The second promotion replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. In the case of , continuous replay winning is established without fail regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, normal replay winning is established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Further, with index values IV=9 to 13, as shown in FIG. 47, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the range of 6 different stopping orders for which the second promotion replay winning is established. 8, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the continuous replay winning is established is different from the index value IV=8 within the range of the six stop orders. As a result, even if the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination in the second preparation state ST5 wins with any of the index values IV=8 to 13, the stop order corresponding to the establishment of the second promotion replay prize is achieved. Unless the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, the second promotion replay winning is not established, and similarly, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the establishment of the continuous replay winning. Continuous replay winning will not be established unless it is completed.

By the way, as a combination of symbols that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay prize, the combination of "replay" symbol, "bell" symbol, "replay" symbol and "bell" symbol, "replay" symbol, "bell" symbol , and a combination of "Replay", "Bell", and "Bell" are set as combinations of symbols that enable continuous replay winning. When the value IV=8 and 9, both the second promotion replay winning and the continuous replay winning require the first stop of the left reel 32L, and when the index values IV=10 and 11, the second promotion replay winning. and continuous replay winning, the middle reel 32M must be stopped first, and when the index value IV=12 and 13, the right reel 32R must be stopped first for both the second promoted replay winning and the continuous replay winning. There is a need. As a result, when one of the index values IV=8 to 13 is won in the second preparation state ST5, any one of the second promoted replay prize, the continuous replay prize, and the normal replay prize is established.

FIG. 48 shows a situation in which the second preparation state ST5 is an advantageous section and the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 are satisfied, and the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is 30 games more than the number of trigger games. To explain how the image display device 63 notifies the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the index value IV=10 is won in a situation where the number of games is more than a small number and less than the number of trigger games. is an explanatory diagram of . As shown in FIG. 48, on the upper edge side of the image display device 63, a continuous game number image G4 is displayed for reporting the number of continuous games in the advantageous section. By confirming the number-of-continued-games image G4, the player can grasp the number of games required to reach the number of opportunity games in the advantageous section. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is displayed, and a configuration in which the number of remaining games until reaching the number of trigger games may be displayed.

A first stop order image G5 is displayed on the center side of the image display device 63 to enable establishment of the second promotion replay winning. The same number of individual images as the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed side by side as the first stop order image G5, and an image indicating the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed for each individual image. Specifically, when the index value IV=10 is won, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. Since the replay prize is established, the images in the order corresponding thereto are displayed as the first stop order image G5.

A second stop order image G6 is displayed on the lower edge side of the image display device 63 to enable establishment of a continuous replay winning. The same number of individual images as the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed side by side as the second stopping order image G6, and an image indicating the stopping order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed for each individual image. Specifically, when the index value IV=10 is won, the 1st stop is the middle reel 32M, the 2nd stop is the right reel 32R, and the 3rd stop is the left reel 32L. is established, the images in the corresponding order are displayed as the second stop order image G6.

By displaying not only the first stop order image G5 but also the second stop order image G6 as described above, when the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 are satisfied in the second preparation state ST5, the advantageous section To allow a player to select whether to establish a second promoted replay prize and shift to RT state ST6 or to establish a continuous replay prize and stay in a second preparation state ST5 in relation to the number of continued games. becomes possible. For example, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval is close to the number of opportunity games, the continuous replay winning is intentionally established to delay the transition to the RT state ST6, so that the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval is greater than or equal to the number of opportunity games. In such a situation, it is possible to shift to RT state ST6. Then, when the number of games is equal to or greater than the trigger game number, the transition to RT state ST6 occurs, and the RT state ST6 progresses in the normal section, so the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6. By doing so, not only is the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 surely satisfied, but also 100% is surely selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. On the other hand, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is far from the number of opportunity games, it is possible to establish the second promotion replay winning and shift to the RT state ST6 early.

A processing configuration for enabling execution of the above notification will be described below. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the notification control process executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG.

In steps S2201 to S2204, the same processes as steps S1101 to S1104 of the notification control process (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment are executed. In the second preparation state ST5, if the winning is made with the index value IV=8 to 13 (step S2205: YES), the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the advantageous end of the main RAM 74 is set. It is determined whether or not the value of the preparation flag is "0" (step S2206). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2206, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of games less than the number of opportunity games by 30 games and less than the number of opportunity games (step S2207). .

If a negative determination is made in step S2207, second display data setting processing is executed (step S2208). In the setting process of the second display data, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second promotion replay prize is based on the information of the combination that was won this time among the index values IV=8 to 13. The display of the combined display section 66 is controlled so that the display of the value corresponding to is started on the combined display section 66 . This display on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the current game. Also, the second stop order command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2209). Information is set in the second stop order command so that the effect-side MPU 92 can specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second promotion replay prize in the current game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2207, third display data setting processing is executed (step S2210). In the setting process of the third display data, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second promotion replay prize is based on the information of the combination that was won this time among the index values IV=8 to 13. and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the continuous replay winning prize. This display on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the current game. Also, the third stop order command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2211). The third stop order command includes the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay winning in this game and the stopping of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the continuous replay winning. Information is set so that the order can be specified by the production side MPU 92 .

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the notification process executed by the effect-side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. Note that the notification process is repeatedly executed in the effect-side MPU 92 at a relatively short period (for example, 4 msec).

When the second stop order command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2301: YES), the image display device 63 displays an image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the second stop order command received this time. Necessary data are set (step S2302). However, at this timing, the image display device 63 does not display the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the second stop order command. After that, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in the counter for measurement provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2303). The notification delay period is set as a period shorter than the acceleration period until the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating and reach a constant speed rotation, and is set to 0.5 msec, for example. The value set in the measurement counter is decremented each time the notification process is started. Then, when the notification delay period has passed, the image display device 63 displays the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the data set in step S2302. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second promotion replay winning.

When the third stop order command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2304: YES), the image display device 63 displays an image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the third stop order command received this time. Necessary data are set (step S2305). However, at this timing, the image display device 63 does not display the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current third stop order command. In step S2305, data corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of the second promotion replay winning, and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of the continuous replay winning. corresponding data and both are set. After that, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in the counter for measurement provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2306). The notification delay period has already been explained. Then, when the notification delay period has passed, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the data set in step S2305 is displayed on the image display device 63. FIG. In this case, both the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of the second promoted replay winning and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of the continuous replay winning are different from the image display device 63. is displayed (see FIG. 48).

Note that in step S2307 of the notification processing, the processing corresponding to the first stop order command and the processing of steps S1204 and S1205 of the notification processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment are executed.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing second preparation state processing executed by the main MPU 72. FIG.

In steps S2401 to S2406, the same processes as steps S1001 to S1006 of the second preparation state process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed. If the second promotion replay winning data is set in the current game and the second promotion replay winning has not been established (step S2403: YES, step S2404: NO), whether or not the continuous replay winning has been established is determined (step S2407). If the continuous replay winning has been established (step S2407: YES), the second preparation state processing is ended as it is. As a result, the second preparation state ST5 continues. If the continuous replay winning has not been established (step S2407: NO), the normal replay winning has been established. In this case, the status counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2408). As a result, the game state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the normal state ST1.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 are satisfied in the second preparation state ST5 and the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is close to the number of opportunity games, the advantageous A player is made to select whether to establish a second promoted replay prize and shift to RT state ST6 or to establish a continuous replay prize and stay in a second preparation state ST5 in relation to the number of continuous games in a section. becomes possible. For example, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval is close to the number of opportunity games, the continuous replay winning is intentionally established to delay the transition to the RT state ST6, so that the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval is greater than or equal to the number of opportunity games. In such a situation, it is possible to shift to RT state ST6. Then, when the number of games is equal to or greater than the trigger game number, the transition to RT state ST6 occurs, and the RT state ST6 progresses in the normal section, so the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6. By doing so, not only is the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 surely satisfied, but also 100% is surely selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. On the other hand, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is far from the number of opportunity games, it is possible to achieve the second promotion replay winning and shift to the RT state ST6 early. With the above configuration, it is possible for the player to predict the optimum timing for establishing the second promotion replay winning, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Also, even if the conditions for transitioning to the RT state ST6 are satisfied in the second preparation state ST5, in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is close to the number of the trigger games and is not within the range of the predetermined number of games. The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is reported, while the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the continuous replay winning is not reported. As a result, it is possible to limit the period during which the user can intentionally stay in the second preparation state ST5, and to prevent the user from staying in the second preparation state ST5 excessively. becomes.

In the second preparation state ST5, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of the second promoted replay winning is notified, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32M that enable the establishment of the continuous replay winning are notified. 32R stop order may be always notified. In this case, it is possible to ensure a long period of time for the player to select.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, a plurality of types of SB winning data are set. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the normal state in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 52, index values IV of "1" to "8" are set in the lottery table for the normal state. The winning data set to the index values IV=1 to 6 are the same as in the first embodiment, and in this case, the 1st SB winning data is set to the index value IV=6. The first SB winning data is the same as the SB winning data in the first embodiment, and the combination of symbols corresponding to establishment of the first SB winning is the same as the combination of symbols corresponding to establishment of the SB winning in the first embodiment. are identical. The second SB winning data is set to the index value IV=7, and the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV=8. The point value PV set to the index value IV=6 is "3000", whereas the point value PV set to the index value IV=7 is "1000". Therefore, the probability of setting the second SB winning data is lower than the probability of setting the first SB winning data. Further, the probability of setting the first SB winning data and the probability of setting the second SB winning data are the same among the setting values of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

The relation between the index value IV and the winning data is the same in the post-bonus state ST3 and the RT state ST6. Further, in the first preparation state ST4, the normal replay winning data and the first promotion replay winning data are set to the index values IV=9 to 14, and in the second preparation state ST5, the index values IV=9 to 14 are set. Normal replay winning data and second promotion replay winning data are set.

The combination of symbols that enables the establishment of the second SB prize is a “LUCKY” symbol on the left reel 32L, a “red 7” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a “red 7” symbol on the right reel 32R. It is a "red 7" design. When the second SB winning data is set, it is possible to achieve the second SB winning regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Depending on the timing of the stop operation, the second SB winning may not be established.

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing transition trigger processing for the RT state ST6 executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG.

First, by determining whether or not the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", it is determined whether or not this is the first game to be started after the transition to the advantageous section occurs ( step S2501). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, after clearing the advantageous start flag of the main side RAM 74 to "0" (step S2502), it is checked whether or not the information of the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set in the main side RAM 74. Determine (step S2503). If a negative determination is made in step S2503, if the transition to the advantageous section this time is triggered by the setting of the first SB winning data (step S2504: YES), the table group corresponding to the first SB winning data (step S2505), and if the transition to the advantageous section this time is triggered by the setting of the second SB winning data (step S2506: YES), the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data is read out ( Step S2507), if the transition to the advantageous section this time is triggered by the establishment of the first BB winning (step S2506: NO), the table corresponding to the first BB winning is read out (step S2508).

The table group corresponding to the 1st SB winning data is the table group shown in FIGS. 21A to 21D in the first embodiment, and the table corresponding to the 1BB winning data is the It is a table shown in FIG.21(e). FIGS. 54(a) to 54(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data. As shown in FIGS. 21(d) and 54(d), the RT state tables are the same for the table group corresponding to the first SB winning data and the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data. As a result, even if either the first SB winning data or the second SB winning data is set in the situation where the RT state ST6 is the normal section, the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is surely satisfied and the maximum continuation is achieved. A percentage of 100% is definitely selected.

As shown in FIGS. 21(b) to 21(c) and FIGS. 54(b) to 54(c), the second table for normal state and the tables for various states are tables corresponding to the first SB winning data. Although the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 are surely established in either the group or the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data, the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is higher in the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data. It is more advantageous for the player than the table group corresponding to the first SB winning data. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 54(a), the first table for the normal state has a structure in which the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 are not reliably established in the table group corresponding to the first SB winning data. On the other hand, in the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data, the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 can be satisfied. Therefore, the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data is more advantageous for the player than the table group corresponding to the first SB winning data. In other words, if the second SB winning data with a relatively low winning probability in the role lottery process (FIG. 13) is set, the first SB winning data with a relatively high winning probability in the role lottery process (FIG. 13) is set. The advantage in the lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 is higher than when set.

Returning to the description of the RT state transition triggering process (FIG. 53), after any one of steps S2505, S2507, and S2508 is executed, a lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 is executed (step S2509). In the transition lottery process, when the current execution trigger is the setting of the first SB winning data, the table corresponding to the current game state among the tables read in step S2505 is referred to, and the lottery process is executed. If the current execution trigger is the setting of the second SB winning data, the table corresponding to the current game state among the tables read out in step S2507 is referred to execute the lottery process, and the current execution trigger is the second SB winning data. In the case of 1BB winning, the lottery process is executed with reference to the table read in step S2508.

When the result of the lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 is a loss result (step S2510: NO), the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2511). As a result, the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are not met. When the result of the lottery process for shifting to RT state ST6 is a winning result (step S2510: YES), the value of the advantageous end preparation flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2512). As a result, the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are established in the advantageous section. Also, a continuation rate storage process is executed (step S2513). In the continuation rate storage process, information on the continuation rate selected when a winning result is obtained in the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is stored in the main side RAM 74 .

According to the above configuration, the first SB winning data and the second SB winning data are set as the SB winning data that triggers the transition to the advantageous section. The advantage of the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed in the first game in which the transition to the advantageous interval is performed is determined by the advantageous interval to which the first SB winning data is set and the second SB winning data. It differs from the advantageous section that was shifted when the was set. As a result, the player not only expects the SB winning data to be set, but also expects to set the SB winning data that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The configuration in which two types of the first SB winning data and the second SB winning data are set as the SB winning data that triggers the transition to the advantageous section is not limited to the configuration in which three or more types are set. good. In this case, each of three or more types of SB winning data may be used as a trigger for transition to the advantageous section, and the degree of advantage in the subsequent lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 may be different.

<Fourth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in terms of the conditions for transitioning to the RT state ST6 and the normal section in relation to the number of continuous games in the advantageous section. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the end processing of the advantageous section executed by the main MPU 72. FIG. In steps S2601 to S2607, the same processes as steps S1901 to S1907 of the advantageous section end process (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment are executed. In step S2608, 1 is added to the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74. FIG. After that, it is determined whether or not the second promotion replay winning prize has been established (step S2609). If the second promotion replay winning has not been established (step S2609: NO), on condition that the value of the continuous game number counter is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (step S2610: YES), the initial stage of the advantageous section (step S2611), and the processing for turning off the advantageous section display section 67 is executed (step S2612).

If the second promotion replay winning has been established (step S2609: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-continued-games counter falls within any of the first to fifth trigger ranges (step S2613). Each of the first to fifth trigger ranges is set as a range of a plurality of continuous game numbers within the range of the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, and there are multiple A game interval is set for the game. Specifically, the first trigger range corresponds to 250 to 300 games, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section, the second trigger range corresponds to 500 to 550 games, and the third trigger range corresponds to the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section. The trigger range corresponds to 750-800 games in the advantageous section, the 4th trigger range corresponds to 1000-1050 games in the advantageous section, and the 5th trigger range corresponds to the advantageous section. It corresponds to 1250 to 1300 games of the number of continuous games.

If the value of the number-of-continued-games counter falls within any of the first to fifth trigger ranges (step S2613: YES), the advantageous interval initialization process is executed (step S2611), and the advantageous interval display section 67 extinguishing process (step S2612). As a result, when the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section falls within any of the first to fifth trigger ranges, the RT state ST6 is the normal section. situation. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the situation where the RT state ST6 is the normal section, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the situation where the game section is the advantageous section.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the manner in which the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing transition trigger processing for the RT state ST6 executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG. First, by determining whether or not the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", it is determined whether or not this is the first game to be started after the transition to the advantageous section occurs ( step S2701). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, after clearing the advantageous start flag of the main side RAM 74 to "0" (step S2702), it is checked whether or not the information of the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set in the main side RAM 74. Determine (step S2703). If a negative determination is made in step S2703, a table corresponding to winning combinations in the current game is read out (step S2704). Then, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed (step S2705). In the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6, the information of the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the read information is collated with the table read in step S2704.

When the result of the lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 is a loss result (step S2706: NO), the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2707). As a result, the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are not met. When the result of the lottery process for shifting to RT state ST6 is a winning result (step S2706: YES), the value of the advantageous end preparation flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2708). As a result, the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are established in the advantageous section. Also, the continuation rate is stored (step S2709). In the continuation rate storage process, information on the continuation rate selected when a winning result is obtained in the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is stored in the main side RAM 74 .

That is, in the present embodiment, when executing the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6, instead of using the table corresponding to the game state at the timing of executing the transition lottery process, in the game that executes the transition lottery process A table corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) is used. In the table, the lower the winning probability in the winning combination process (FIG. 13), the higher the probability of winning the transition to the RT state ST6 in the corresponding table. The lower the probability of winning in , the higher the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 in the corresponding table is set to be more likely to be selected. As a result, the player can pay attention to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in the first game after shifting to the advantageous section, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 may be executed using a table corresponding to the combination of the game state and the combination lottery process (FIG. 13) in the first game after shifting to the advantageous section. . In this case, it is possible to make the execution mode of the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 more complicated, and to prevent the lottery process for transition from being uniform.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as a table referred to in the lottery process for transition to RT state ST6, a table corresponding to a combination with different winning probabilities among the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6" is also set. However, instead of this, if the winning combination is won, the transition lottery process may not be executed even in the first game after shifting to the advantageous section, and after shifting to the advantageous section. When the winning combination is won in the first game, the execution of the transition lottery process is delayed, and after that, in the game in which the winning probability is common among the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6", the winning combination is won. A configuration may be adopted in which the lottery process for transitioning to the RT state ST6 is executed using a table corresponding to the winning combination. In this case, it is possible to prevent the settings from being advantageous or disadvantageous in terms of the probability that the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied.

In addition, the type of replay winning data that is likely to be set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) is made different for each of the game states ST1, ST3 to ST6 to correspond to the type of replay winning data set in the game that has shifted to the advantageous section. A configuration may be adopted in which the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed using a table for the RT state. For example, the first to fifth replay winning data can be set in any of the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5 and the RT state ST6. The replay winning data is likely to be set, the second replay winning data is likely to be set in the post-bonus state ST3, the third replay winning data is likely to be set in the first preparation state ST4, and the fourth replay winning data is likely to be set in the second preparation state ST5. The configuration is such that the replay winning data is easily set, and the fifth replay winning data is easily set in the RT state ST6. Then, the lottery table is set so that the larger the value of n in the n-th replay winning data, the more likely it is to win the transition lottery in the transition lottery process to RT state ST6. As a result, while making the probability of transition winning in the transition lottery process to RT state ST6 different according to the game state, a table with a relatively low probability of transition winning in any game state and It is possible to allow any of the relatively tall tables to be selected.

<Sixth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the manner in which the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the control processing of the game section executed by the main side MPU 72. As shown in FIG.

In step S2801 of the game section control process, the same processes as steps S1401 to S1408 of the game section control process (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment are executed. In addition, in the control processing of the game section, if the advantageous section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" and it is an advantageous section (step S2802: YES), the processing of steps S2812 and S2813 is executed. The processing contents of these steps S2812 and S2813 are the same as steps S1416 and S1417 in the game section control processing (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

If it is a normal section (step S2802: NO), if the SB winning data is set in this game (step S2803: YES), both the advantageous section flag and the advantageous start flag of the main side RAM 74 are set to "1". ' is set (step S2804), and the value of the continuous game number counter in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2805). Further, lighting processing is executed to turn on the advantageous section display section 67 (step S2806).

After that, a transfer lottery process at the time of winning is executed (step S2807). In the transition lottery process at the time of winning, the common table is read from the main ROM 73, the lottery counter information periodically updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the read lottery counter information is collated with the common table. . The common table is common irrespective of the current gaming state and the current set values, and is specifically set so that there is a probability of 10% that a transition to the RT state ST6 will be won.

In the transition lottery process at the time of winning, when the transition to RT state ST6 is won (step S2808: YES), the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2809). As a result, the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are satisfied. Also, a continuation rate storage process is executed (step S2810). In the storage process, information of 50%, which is the lowest continuous rate, is stored in the main RAM 74 . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if a winning result is obtained in the transfer lottery process at the time of winning, the continuation rate to be set may be selected from 6 stages of continuation rates.

In step S2811, the same processing as steps S1413 to S1415 of the game section control processing (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment is executed.

FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing transition trigger processing for the RT state ST6 executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG.

First, by determining whether or not the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", it is determined whether or not this is the first game to be started after the transition to the advantageous section occurs ( step S2901). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, after clearing the advantageous start flag of the main side RAM 74 to "0" (step S2902), it is checked whether or not the information of the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set in the main side RAM 74. It judges (step S2903). If a negative determination is made in step S2903, a lottery process for shifting to RT state ST6 is executed (step S2904). In the transition lottery process, a lottery is executed using a table corresponding to the current game state, as in step S1504 of the transition trigger process (FIG. 32) for the RT state ST6 in the first embodiment. Then, if the result of the lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 is a failure result (step S2905: NO), the advantageous end preparation flag of main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2906), and the state goes to RT state ST6. If the result of the transition lottery process is a winning (step S2905: YES), the value of the advantageous end preparation flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2907). As a result, the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are established in the advantageous section. Also, the continuation rate is stored (step S2908). In the continuation rate storage process, information on the continuation rate selected when a winning result is obtained in the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is stored in the main side RAM 74 .

If it is determined in step S2903 that information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set in the main RAM 74, a promotion lottery process for the continuation rate is executed (step S2909). In the promotion lottery process, the promotion lottery table corresponding to the current game state is read. The promotion lottery table is set so that the probability of a winning result in the promotion lottery process differs depending on the game state. Then, the information of the lottery counter which is periodically updated in the main side RAM 74 is read, and the read information is collated with the promotion lottery table corresponding to the current game state. If promotion is won (step S2910: YES), the continuation rate update process is executed (step S2911). In the continuation rate update process, the continuation rate information stored in the main-side RAM 74 is updated so that the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is one step higher. If the continuation rate has already reached the maximum, the continuation rate promotion lottery process (step S2909) is not executed.

According to the above configuration, the lottery process for transitioning to the RT state ST6 is executed not only in the game that is first started after shifting to the advantageous section, but also in the game in which the SB winning data that triggers the transition to the advantageous section is set. be done. As a result, the lottery process for transitioning to the RT state ST6 is executed a plurality of times with respect to the transition to the advantageous section, making it possible to increase the frequency with which the conditions for transitioning to the RT state ST6 are satisfied.

In addition, in the transition lottery process at the time of winning executed in the game in which the SB winning data that triggers the transition to the advantageous section is set, a common table is used regardless of the current gaming state and the current set values. A lottery will be held. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration of the transfer lottery process at the time of winning.

In addition, in the transition lottery process at the time of winning, when the transition lottery process to RT state ST6 is won, the promotion lottery process for the continuation rate is executed in the game first started after shifting to the advantageous section. As a result, in the event that a transition to RT state ST6 is won in the transition lottery process at the time of winning, there will be an opportunity to further increase the continuation rate of RT state ST6, and the winning will be won in the transition lottery process at the time of winning. It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the result.

Also in the transition lottery process at the time of winning, a lottery may be executed as to whether or not the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 is established using a table corresponding to the game states ST1 to ST6 at that time. For example, various tables may be set so that the probabilities of transitioning to the RT state ST6 and winning are different according to the game states ST1 to ST6. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the game states ST1 to ST6 at the time when the SB winning data is set.

In addition, in the transition lottery process at the time of winning, when the transition to RT state ST6 is won, the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate is performed in the RT state ST6 transition trigger process that is executed after being set in the advantageous section. Instead of being executed, the promotion lottery process for the continuation rate may be configured not to be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantage of setting the SB winning data from becoming extremely high.

In addition, even when the 1BB prize is established in the normal section, the transition lottery process at the time of winning is executed at that time, and also when the situation is the 1BB state and the advantageous section, the RT state ST6 is entered. A transition lottery process or a promotion lottery process for a continuation rate may be executed. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of generating the first BB state.

Also, in one of the cases where the advantageous section is set based on the setting of the SB winning data and the case where the advantageous section is set based on the establishment of the first BB winning, the transition lottery at the time of winning Not only the process but also the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 or promotion lottery process of the continuation rate is executed based on the fact that the advantageous section is set after that, and on the other hand, the transition lottery process at the time of winning is not executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 or the lottery process for promotion of the continuation rate is executed based on the setting of the advantageous section. On the one hand, not only the transition lottery process at the time of winning, but also the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 or the promotion lottery process for the continuation rate based on the setting of the advantageous section after that is executed, and the other is at the time of winning. While the transition lottery process is executed, the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 based on the setting of the advantageous section and the promotion lottery process for the continuation rate may not be executed. As a result, when the advantageous section is set based on the setting of the SB winning data and when the advantageous section is set based on the establishment of the 1st BB winning, the degree of advantage regarding the transition to the RT state ST6 is determined. It is possible to give a difference to

<Seventh Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the condition for forcibly ending the advantageous interval is different from that of the first embodiment described above in relation to the number of games continued in the advantageous interval. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing advantageous section end processing executed by the main MPU 72 . In steps S3001 to S3007, the same processes as steps S1901 to S1907 of the advantageous section end process (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment are executed. In step S3008, 1 is added to the value of the number-of-continued-games counter in the main RAM 74. FIG. Thereafter, on condition that the value of the continuous game number counter is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (step S3009: YES), the advantageous interval initialization process is executed (step S3010), and the advantageous interval display section 67 extinguishing process is executed (step S3011).

In other words, in this embodiment, the condition for forcibly ending the advantageous interval in relation to the number of games continued in the advantageous interval is only the condition that the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games. , even if the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section has reached the number of trigger games, the advantageous section is not terminated. Therefore, in order to create a situation in which the RT state ST6 is the normal section, it is necessary that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games during the RT state ST6. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of situations in which the RT state ST6 is the normal section. Then, in the case where the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 and in the normal section, the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are surely established as in the first embodiment, and the state of the RT state ST6 is established. The continuation rate is the maximum continuation rate. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the frequency with which the profit is given, and it is possible to enhance the satisfaction of the player when the profit is given.

Also, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the RT state ST6, the RT state ST6 is usually the one that reaches the upper limit number of games at an early stage after the start of the RT state ST6. It is possible to ensure a large number of games to be executed in a certain state of the section. As a result, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage associated with being in the normal section in the RT state ST6 according to the timing when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the ART state is set as the advantageous game state instead of the RT state ST6. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning.

As in the first embodiment, there are bell prizes, watermelon prizes, cherry prizes, normal replay prizes, first promotion replay prizes, second promotion replay prizes, first BB prizes, second BB prizes, and SB prizes. are doing. The correspondence relationship between these winning modes and combinations of symbols is the same as in the first embodiment. Further, in this embodiment, apart from these winning modes, there are a first compensation winning, a second compensation winning, and a third compensation winning. On the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is either a "BAR" symbol or a "WHITE 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is " If it is a "bell" symbol, it will be the first compensation winning prize. Further, on the main line ML, the left reel 32L has either a "watermelon" symbol or a "LUCKY" symbol, the middle reel 32M has a "bell" symbol, and the right reel 32R has a stopped symbol. If it is a "bell" symbol, it will be the second compensation winning prize. Further, on the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, 3rd Compensation Award. If any one of the first to third supplementary prizes is won, the number of game media to be awarded becomes “1”. This award target number is a number smaller than the maximum number of bets required to start one game (specifically, "3"). It should be noted that the number of game media to be granted when a bell win occurs is "11", and this number to be granted is greater than the maximum number of bets required to start one game (specifically, "3"). It is a large number.

FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the normal state in this embodiment. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the winning modes established when the normal state lottery table is selected.

As shown in FIG. 61, index values IV of "1" to "9" are set in the lottery table for the normal state. The winning data set to index values IV=4 to 9 are the same as the winning data set to index values IV=2 to 7 in the lottery table for the normal state in the first embodiment. On the other hand, index values IV=1 to 3 are set to either bell winning data or first to third compensation winning data.

Specifically, the index value IV=1 is set with the bell winning data and the first complementary winning data. When the winning is made with the index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. A bell winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, a first compensation winning prize is surely generated.

As shown in FIG. 61, the index value IV=2 is set with bell winning data and second complementary winning data. In the case of winning with index value IV=2, as shown in FIG. The bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the second compensation winning is surely established.

As shown in FIG. 61, the index value IV=3 is set with bell winning data and third complementary winning data. When the winning is made with the index value IV=3, as shown in FIG. A bell winning prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, a third compensation winning prize is surely established.

The point value PV set for each of the index values IV=1 to 3 is all "13000", and the winning probabilities in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) are the same. . Also, the point value PV set for each of the index values IV=1 to 3 is the same for any of the set values "setting 1" to "setting 6".

FIGS. 63(a) to 63(e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining winning data set to an index value IV of 9 or higher in each game state ST1, ST3 to ST6 other than the BB state ST2. The contents of winning data set to index values IV=1 to 8 and the point values PV set to index values IV=1 to 8 are the same in each game state ST1, ST3 to ST6 other than the BB state ST2. is. Also, the lottery table for the BB state ST2 is the same as that of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 63(a), 63(b) and 63(e), normal state ST1, post-bonus state ST3 and RT state ST6 all have the maximum index value IV of "9". , index value IV=9, only replay winning data is set.

As shown in FIG. 63(c), in the first preparation state ST4, only normal replay winning data is set to index value IV=9, and normal replay winning data and first promoted replay winning data are set to index values IV=10 to 15. Combination with data is set. The relationship between the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the established winning mode at index values IV=10 to 15 is the same as in the case of index values IV=8 to 13 in the first preparation state ST4 in the first embodiment. is.

As shown in FIG. 63(d), in the second preparation state ST5, only normal replay winning data is set to index value IV=9, and normal replay winning data and second promotion replay winning data are set to index values IV=10 to 15. Combination with data is set. The relationship between the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the established winning mode when the index value IV is 10 to 15 is the same as when the index value IV is 8 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5 in the first embodiment. is.

The probability of establishing a replay prize including the normal replay prize, the first promotion replay prize, and the second promotion replay prize is normal state ST1<post-bonus state ST3=first preparation state ST4<second preparation state ST5<RT state ST6 relationship. Therefore, even in this embodiment, among the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5 and the RT state ST6, the RT state ST6 is the gaming state with the highest degree of advantage. , the normal state ST1 is the game state with the lowest advantage.

The mode of transition between the game states ST1 to ST6 is the same as in the first embodiment. That is, when the first BB prize is established in any of the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5 and the RT state ST6, the state is shifted to the first BB state, and the second BB prize is awarded. If it is established, the state is shifted to the second BB state. When the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state is completed, the state shifts to the post-bonus state ST3, and when the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 but the SB prize is not established, the first preparation state is entered. When the first promotion replay winning is established in the first preparation state ST4, the state shifts to the second preparation state ST5, and when the second promotion replay winning is established in the second preparation state ST5, the RT state. Move to ST6. Further, the mode of transition to the advantageous section and the conditions for executing the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 are also the same as in the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, in the game states ST1, ST3 to ST6 other than the BB state ST2 and in the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". , the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of a bell prize when one of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is won is notified by the image display device 63 and the dual-use display unit 66, and the BB state. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of a bell prize even if one of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is won in the game states ST1, ST3 to ST6 other than ST2 and in the normal section. Stopping order is not reported. In this way, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of a bell prize in the advantageous section is notified, so that the advantage of the game section becoming the advantageous section can be increased.

FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the notification control process executed by the main MPU 72. FIG.

If any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is won in the non-BB state (any game state of normal state ST1, post-bonus state ST3, first preparation state ST4, second preparation state ST5 and RT state ST6) (Step S3101: YES) On the condition that the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the current game section is an advantageous section (Step S3102: YES), setting processing of bell display data is executed (step S3103). In the bell display data setting process, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of a bell prize is determined based on the information on the combination that was won this time among the index values IV=1 to 3. The combined display section 66 is controlled so that the display of the value is started on the combined display section 66 . This display on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the current game.

After that, a bell stop order command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3104). Information is set in the bell stop order command so that the production side MPU 92 can specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables the establishment of a bell prize in this game. When the production-side MPU 92 receives the bell stop order command, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of the bell winning at the timing before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes possible in this game. The image display device 63 starts notification of the stop order.

After that, the notified flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3105). The reported flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been reported one or more times to enable establishment of a bell prize in the case of shifting to an advantageous section. is.

Steps S3106 to S3113 in the notification control process are the same as steps S1101 to S1108 in the notification control process (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the end processing of the advantageous section executed by the main MPU 72. FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not the condition for shifting to the normal state ST1 is satisfied in the current game (step S3201). This process is the same as step S1901 of the advantageous interval end process (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. When the conditions for shifting to the normal state ST1 are satisfied (step S3201: YES), by determining whether or not the notified flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", It is determined whether or not the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been notified once or more (step S3202). If the notified flag is set to "1" (step S3202: YES), the advantageous section initialization process is executed in the same manner as step S1902 of the advantageous section ending process (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. (step S3203). As a result, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section. After that, a light-off process is executed to turn off the advantageous section display section 67 (step S3204).

On the other hand, if the notified flag of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S3202: NO), the delay flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set without executing the advantageous section initialization process. "1" is set (step S3205). The delay flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify that the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section is being delayed. When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be established is notified and the notified flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section.

In the end processing of the advantageous section, when the current game state is the normal state ST1 and the advantageous end preparation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (steps S3206 and S3207: YES), the main side RAM 74 It is determined whether or not the notified flag is set to "1" (step S3208). If the notified flag is set to "1" (step S3208: YES), as in steps S3203 and S3204, the advantageous section initialization process is executed (step S3209), and the advantageous section display unit 67 is displayed. A light-extinguishing process for turning off the light is executed (step S3210). If the notified flag is not set to "1" (step S3208: NO), the delay flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3211).

If a negative determination is made in either step S3206 or step S3207, 1 is added to the value of the continuous game number counter in the main RAM 74 (step S3212). Then, on condition that the value of the continuous game number counter is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (step S3213: YES), it is determined whether or not the notified flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". (step S3214). If the notified flag is set to "1" (step S3214: YES), as in steps S3203 and S3204, the advantageous section initialization process is executed (step S3215), and the advantageous section display unit 67 is displayed. A light-off process is executed to set the light-off state (step S3216). If the notified flag is not set to "1" (step S3214: NO), the delay flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3217).

When a negative determination is made in step S3213, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to each of the notified flag and the delay flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3218). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3218, similar to steps S3203 and S3204, initialization processing of the advantageous interval is executed (step S3219), and extinguishing processing for extinguishing the advantageous interval display section 67 is executed. (step S3220). Note that in the advantageous section initialization processing in each of steps S3203, S3209, S3215, and S3219, the reported flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" and the delay flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0." do.

According to the above configuration, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of a bell prize at least once in the non-BB state is notified when the game shifts to the advantageous section. The number of game media provided when a bell win is established is a number larger than the number of bets required to start one game (specifically, "3"). As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage of shifting to the advantageous section, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to shifting to the advantageous section.

Even if the game state shifts to the normal state ST1, if the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R enabling establishment of the bell prize is not notified after the shift to the advantageous section, it is advantageous even in the normal state ST1. The interval is maintained, and when the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of a bell prize is reported, the game interval shifts from the advantageous interval to the normal interval. As a result, when shifting to the normal state ST1, the game section does not unambiguously become a normal section. In some cases, the normal section may be set by announcing the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of a prize. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the game section changes from the advantageous section to the normal section.

When the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section in the normal state ST1, the reel 32L does not immediately return to the normal section when one game is completed in the advantageous section, but enables establishment of a bell prize in the advantageous section. , 32M, and 32R, the normal section is resumed. Thereby, when the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section in the normal state ST1, it is possible to diversify the timing of returning to the normal section.

The number of notification times of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of a bell prize required for the end of the advantageous section is set to one. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of games in which the player stays in the advantageous section when the transition to the advantageous section in the normal state ST1 does not satisfy the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6.

In the RT state ST6, which is an advantageous section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of a bell prize is notified, and the probability of establishment of a replay prize increases, whereas the RT state. In ST6, which is the normal section, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the bell prize is not reported, but the probability of the establishment of the replay prize increases. This makes it possible to set a plurality of levels of advantage even in the RT state ST6.

It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the advantageous section can be terminated by executing once the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the bell prize. A configuration may be adopted in which it is necessary to notify the order more than a predetermined number of times, such as two or three times.

Further, after the notification of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of a bell prize is executed the number of times that can be terminated, an end lottery process for determining whether or not to end the advantageous section is executed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section when the end lottery process fails to continue. Although the timing for executing this ending lottery process is arbitrary, for example, if the number of times the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed becomes the number of times that the end lottery process is possible, the ending lottery process is executed in each game. The process may be executed, or the ending lottery process may be executed when a predetermined lottery opportunity is won or when a predetermined lottery opportunity win is established.

In addition to the bell winning, the winning data is set such that when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a predetermined stopping order, a winning is established and a game medium is given when the winning is established. may be configured. In this case, in order to end the advantageous section, the winning with the largest number of game media awarded among the plurality of types of winnings established when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in a predetermined stopping order ends. It may be configured to be established more than the triggering number of times, and among the plurality of types of prizes that are established when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a predetermined stop order, the number of given game media is the smallest. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which winning must be established at least the number of times that is the end trigger.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of each embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. In addition, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following other forms may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) The game section is not limited to a configuration in which a normal section in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified and an advantageous section in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be notified are set. Although the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be notified in any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a plurality of sections having different types of winning data to be notified of the stop order may be set. , 32M, and 32R may be notified, but a plurality of intervals may be set in which the frequency of notification of the stop order is different. Even in this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the transition of the game section by giving a difference in the degree of advantage regarding the notification of the stop order in a plurality of sections.

(2) When the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 and in the normal section, the continuation rate of 100% is surely selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. However, if a continuation rate other than 100% is selected, or if the continuation rate of 100% is not selected, the selection mode of the continuation rate is more advantageous than the case where the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is executed in other situations. A high configuration is also possible. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the setting of the SB winning data in the RT state ST6 and the normal section.

(3) Transition to RT state ST6, which is executed when SB winning data is set in a situation where RT state ST6 is a normal section. It is not limited to a configuration in which the degree of advantage is higher than that of the transfer lottery process, and may be the same or substantially the same as the advantage of the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 executed in another predetermined situation. , the advantage may be lower than the lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 executed in other situations. In addition, even in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed when the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 and in the normal section, it may not be possible to win the transition. .

(4) When the RT state ST6 is reached and the normal section is reached, the provision of the profit to the player may be fixed at that time. For example, when the RT state ST6 is in the normal section, even if the SB winning data is not set in the situation, the SB in the other game states ST1, ST3 to ST5 after the RT state ST6 is completed. A configuration may be adopted in which the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 which is executed for the first setting of the winning data ensures that the player wins the transition to the RT state ST6. may be configured such that the continuation rate of is selected. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of being in the RT state ST6 and in the normal section.

(5) The trigger for shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is not limited to either the setting of the SB winning data or the establishment of the 1st BB winning. For example, the SB winning data is set. In addition, the fact that the SB prize is not established may be the trigger for shifting to the advantageous section. In this case, the timing when the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantage section and the timing when the game state shifts from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4 are the same.

Also, the setting of the watermelon winning data may be a trigger for shifting to the advantageous section, the watermelon winning data being set and the watermelon winning being established, or the watermelon winning data being set and the watermelon winning being established. Not doing so may be an opportunity to shift to the advantageous section. Also, the setting of the cherry-winning data may be a trigger for shifting to the advantageous section, and the cherry-winning data is set and the cherry-winning is established, or the cherry-winning data is set and the cherry-winning is established. Not doing so may be an opportunity to shift to the advantageous section. By using the fact that the corresponding prize is not established as a trigger for shifting to the advantageous section, it is possible to configure a configuration in which the shift to the advantageous section is triggered by the occurrence of a so-called dropout.

Further, the setting of the bell winning data may be the trigger for shifting to the advantageous section, or the setting of the bell winning data and establishment of the bell winning may be the trigger for shifting to the advantageous section. Further, the setting of the normal replay winning data may be the trigger for shifting to the advantageous section, or the setting of the normal replay winning data and establishment of the normal replay prize may be the trigger for shifting to the advantageous section. good too.

In the case of each of the above configurations, the timing when the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section does not completely match the timing when the game state shifts from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4.

(6) Transition to RT state ST6 In the lottery process, the transition to RT state ST6 is won and even if the conditions for transition to RT state ST6 are satisfied, the transition to normal state ST1 is performed before the second promotion replay winning is established. When it occurs, it is not limited to the configuration in which the state in which the condition for transition to RT state ST6 is established is canceled, and the transition lottery process for transition to RT state ST6 is won and the condition for transition to RT state ST6 is satisfied. A configuration may be adopted in which, when the transition condition is satisfied, the state in which the transition condition is satisfied is not canceled until the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of satisfying the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6.

(7) Transition to RT state ST6 In the lottery process, transition to RT state ST6 If the conditions for transition to RT state ST6 are satisfied and the conditions for transition to RT state ST6 are satisfied, the process proceeds to RT state ST6 without waiting for the establishment of the second promotion replay winning prize It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a transition occurs. For example, in the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, or the second preparation state ST5, when the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is won, the RT state is started from the next game. A configuration in which ST6 is started may be used. Further, in the BB state ST2, when a transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is won, the RT state ST6 may be started when the BB state ST2 ends. Further, in the RT state ST6, when a transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is won, a new execution of the RT state ST6 may be started from the next game. This makes it possible to start the RT state ST6 early.

(8) A configuration may be adopted in which transition to the RT state ST6 does not occur unless it is in an advantageous section. In this case, since the transition to the RT state ST6 does not occur in the normal section, it is possible to increase the advantage of being in the advantageous section.

(9) When the second promotion replay prize is established in the normal section and the RT state ST6 is entered, a low continuation rate is selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6, or a continuation rate of 0% is selected. good. In the former case, even if the second promotion replay win is established in the normal section and the state shifts to RT state ST6, the probability of continuing winning in the continuous lottery process that is executed when the RT state ST6 ends once becomes low. In the latter case, even if the second promotion replay prize is established in the normal section and the RT state ST6 is entered, when the RT state ST6 ends, the state is shifted to the normal state ST1 before returning to the RT state ST6. higher probability. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of transitioning to the RT state ST6 in the advantageous section.

(10) When the second promotion replay prize is established in the normal section and the game moves to the RT state ST6, the game section may be maintained in the normal section in the RT state ST6. In this case, since a situation occurs in which the RT state ST6 is a normal section, the SB winning data is set in this situation, so that not only the advantageous section is set but also the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is established without fail, and 100%, which is the most advantageous continuation rate of the RT state ST6, is selected.

(11) Benefits such as the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of the first promotion replay winning and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of the second promotion replay winning in the normal section Although the notification of the stop order that is directly linked to is not executed, the notification of the stop order for performance that is not directly linked to profit may be executed. For example, if only the normal replay winning data is set, the normal replay winning will be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In the configuration in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is intentionally notified for the purpose of effect, the stop order may be notified only in the normal section or in both the normal section and the advantageous section. By applying this configuration to a configuration in which it is difficult or impossible for a player to recognize whether a game section is a normal section or an advantageous section, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, it can be determined. The player expects that the establishment of the transition condition for the RT state ST6 is the basis, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(12) When the second promotion replay winning data is set in the second preparation state ST5, if the second promotion replay winning is established, it moves to the RT state ST6, and if the second promotion replay winning is not established. is configured to shift to the normal state ST1, but the present invention is not limited to this. The index value IV that triggers the transition to state ST1 may be different.

(13) When the first promotion replay winning data is set in the first preparation state ST4, if the first promotion replay winning is established, the process shifts to the second preparation state ST5, and the first promotion replay winning is not established. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the index value IV that generates a trigger for the transition from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5 and the first preparation The index value IV that triggers the transition from the state ST4 to the normal state ST1 may be different.

(14) In the normal state ST1, regardless of the number of games continuously executed in the normal state ST1, a configuration may be adopted in which winning is not always transferred to the RT state ST6, or a configuration in which the lottery process for the transfer to the RT state ST6 is not executed. . As a result, it is necessary to generate the BB state ST2 in order to cause the transition to the RT state ST6 in the middle of the normal state ST1, so it is possible to increase the player's attention to the BB state ST2.

(15) When the number of games continuously executed in the normal state ST1 reaches the upper limit number of games on the normal side, the normal state ST1 ends and shifts to the first preparation state ST4. Additionally or additionally, when a predetermined transition combination is won, the transition to the first preparation state ST4 may occur, and when a predetermined transition win is established, the transition to the first preparation state ST4 may occur. may be configured.

(16) Triggered by the winning of the index value IV=2 or 3 in the subsequent 1BB state only when the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed at the start of the 1BB state is successful. It is good also as a structure by which the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate of RT state ST6 is performed. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of player's attention to the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 which is executed at the start of the first BB state.

(17) Since the replay winning probability is higher in the first preparation state ST4 than in the post-bonus state ST3 or the expected number of game media to be awarded is higher, the player is in the first preparation state ST4 than in the post-bonus state ST3. It may be a configuration that is advantageous for This makes it possible to increase the attention of the player to the transition from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4.

(18) When the advantageous section ends in the RT state ST6 and the advantageous section, the RT state ST6 may be terminated at that time. In this case, when the RT state ST6 ends, it may be configured to transition to the normal state ST1, may be configured to transition to the post-bonus state ST3, may be configured to transition to the first preparation state ST4, or may be configured to transition to the second state ST4. It may be configured to shift to the preparation state ST5. Further, instead of the RT state ST6, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the bell prize as in the eighth embodiment is reported, and the probability of establishment of the replay prize does not increase. In the configuration for shifting to the AT state, the AT state may be terminated at the time when the advantageous section ends in the AT state and the advantageous section.

(19) A configuration may be adopted in which the notice for making the player recognize which game section is is executed in a place other than the advantageous section display section 67 . For example, at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 may be configured to execute an effect that allows the player to recognize which game section is which. In addition to or in place of these configurations, information indicating which game section is being output may be configured to be output to the hall computer of the game hall.

(20) Transition to RT state ST6 When the lottery process is executed, the player may be notified of it. Further, when the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed, the result may be notified to the player. The mode of this notification is arbitrary, and for example, the configuration may be such that the above notification is performed using an effect in at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

Also, when the continuation lottery process or the promotion lottery process is executed, the player may be notified of it, and the result thereof may also be notified to the player. The mode of this notification is arbitrary, and for example, the configuration may be such that the above notification is performed using an effect in at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

(21) When the first BB winning is established in the advantageous section, the game section may be set to the advantageous section once after being set to the normal section in the first BB state. As a result, even when the first BB winning is established in the advantageous section, it is possible to execute the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 triggered by resetting to the advantageous section. In this case, for example, when the first BB state starts, the game section may be set to the normal section, and when the first BB state ends, the game section may be set to the advantageous section. It is also possible to set the game section to the advantageous section based on the winning of the trigger role in the lottery process of the combination in the first BB state or the establishment of the trigger prize.

(22) Transition to RT state ST6 The variable elements for making the execution mode of the lottery process differ according to the game states ST1 to ST6 at that time are the probability of winning the transition to RT state ST6 and the RT It is not limited to the continuation rate of the state ST6, for example, the probability of winning the transition to the RT state ST6 is the same in any of the game states ST1 to ST6, but the transition to the RT state ST6 is won. The continuation rate selected in each case may be different depending on the game state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the mode of selection of the number of continued games in the RT state ST6, which is selected when a transition to 2 is won, differs according to the game states ST1 to ST6.

(23) The termination trigger of the RT state ST6 is not limited to the configuration in which the number of games executed in the RT state ST6 becomes the number of games to be terminated. If there is a replay winning prize, the falling replay winning data is set, and if the falling replay winning data is established, the RT state ST6 ends, and even if the falling replay winning data is set, the falling replay winning becomes established. Otherwise, the RT state ST6 may be maintained. In this case, when falling replay winning data is set in the RT state ST6 and in the advantageous section, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid establishment of the falling replay winning prize is notified, In the RT state ST6 and the normal section, even if falling replay winning data is set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can avoid establishment of falling replay winning prize may not be notified.

(24) When the first table for the normal state is referred to, it is configured not to win the transition to the RT state ST6 in the lottery process. In this case, in order to increase the advantage of performing the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 in another game state, it is preferable to refer to the first table for the normal state rather than to refer to other tables. is configured to have a lower probability of transition winning. In addition, when the second table for the normal state is referred to, the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 ensures that the player wins the transfer, but it may be possible that the player may not win the transfer. In this case, in order to increase the advantage of referring to the second table for the normal state in the normal state ST1, the second table for the normal state should be referenced more than the first table for the normal state. The configuration is such that the probability of winning the transfer is higher in the case where the In addition, when the table for various states is referred to, it is configured that the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 surely wins the transfer, but it may be possible that the transfer won does not occur. In this case, in order to increase the advantage of executing the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 in the various game states ST3 to ST5, the table for the various states is more important than the first table for the normal state. is referred to, the probability of transition winning is higher.

(25) The table referred to in the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is common for each state in any of the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5. However, a table may be set corresponding to each of the game states ST3 to ST5. In this case, the table referred to in the post-bonus state ST3 may be most advantageous, and the table referred to in the first preparation state ST4 may be most advantageous and referred to in the second preparation state ST5. A table may be the most advantageous configuration.

(26) If a transition to the BB state ST2 occurs in a situation where the advantageous end preparation flag is set to "1", the advantageous end preparation flag may be cleared to "0". For example, if the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize is established in the advantageous section and the advantageous end preparation flag is set to "1", the advantageous end preparation flag is set to "0" when the transition to the BB state ST2 is made. "clear. As a result, when the transition to the BB state ST2 is made, the state is an advantageous section and the value of the advantageous end preparation flag is "0". The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of the replay winning is notified, and when the state shifts to the second preparation state ST5, the reels 32L, 32M, and the reels that enable the establishment of the second promotion replay winning. 32R stop order is announced.

(27) Although the number of games played in the BB state ST2 and the advantageous interval is counted as the number of games continuously played in the advantageous interval, the present invention is not limited to this. , The number of games executed in the BB state ST2 may not be counted as the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous interval even if it is in the advantageous interval. In this case, if the interval before the start of the BB state ST2 was an advantageous interval, the interval after the end of the BB state ST2 is also considered to be an advantageous interval, and the number of games continued in the advantageous interval before the start of the BB state ST2 is the BB state. The configuration is such that it can be handed over even after the end of ST2. According to this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the number of continuous games in the advantageous section to reach the upper limit number of games.

(28) A configuration may be adopted in which no game section is set in the BB state ST2. In this case, even if the BB state ST2 is started in the advantageous interval, the number of games executed in the BB state ST2 is not counted as the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous interval. Further, in this configuration, if the interval before the start of the BB state ST2 is in the advantageous interval, the interval after the end of the BB state ST2 is also maintained in the advantageous interval, and the advantageous interval before the start of the BB state ST2 continues the game. The configuration is such that the number is taken over even after the BB state ST2 ends. According to this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the number of continuous games in the advantageous section to reach the upper limit number of games.

(29) When calculating the ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous interval to the total number of games, the number of games executed in the BB state ST2 may not be added to the total number of games in the advantageous interval.

(30) The ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous interval to the total number of games may be calculated for each set value. In this case, even if the setting value is changed, the calculation should be continued without initializing the information of the ratio performed for each setting value. According to this configuration, it is possible to grasp the ratio for each set value.

(31) In the substrate box 81, a blocking sheet may be provided in the opposing wall portion facing the device mounting surface of the main control board 71 in the opposing area facing the first to third information display devices 85 to 87. The blocking sheet is provided to make the inside of the board box 81, more specifically, the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 invisible through the area in which the blocking sheet is provided in the board box 81. . Specifically, a hologram sheet is provided as a shielding sheet, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a reflective sheet or diffusely reflective sheet is provided may be employed. Due to the presence of the shielding sheet, even if the area in which the shielding sheet is provided in the board box 81 is viewed from the front, the presence of the shielding sheet prevents the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 from being seen. becomes impossible. As a result, when the front door 12 is opened to the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 for the purpose of maintenance or the like while a game is being played in the slot machine 10, the first to third notifications are given by the player. This reduces the possibility that the display devices 85 to 87 will be seen. On the other hand, since the shielding sheet is provided in a partial area of the opposing wall portion, by obliquely viewing the opposing wall portion toward the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87, these first It is possible to view the display surfaces of the third notification display devices 85 to 87 from the outside of the board box 81 . Therefore, the manager of the game hall can visually check the notification contents of each determination result on the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 from the outside of the board box 81 .

Incidentally, the blocking sheet may not be provided in the area facing the main side MPU 72 in the facing wall portion. As a result, even if the shielding sheet is provided, it is possible to prevent the visibility from deteriorating when visually confirming the main side MPU 72 .

It should be noted that a configuration in which a member for reducing the visibility of the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 is provided instead of the blocking sheet may be provided. For example, a colored transparent sheet with low transparency may be provided in place of the shielding sheet. In this case, when the sheet is viewed from the front, although the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 can be visually recognized, the display contents on the display surfaces are difficult to see.

(32) Store the total number of games played regardless of the gaming state ST1 to ST6 and the number of advantageous games, which is the total number of games played in the advantageous section, as history information, and store the total number of games; Although it is configured to calculate the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the number, it is not limited to this. It may be stored as information and configured to calculate the winning probability of the predetermined combination. In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as target predetermined combinations, and the number of wins for each of the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination is individually stored as history information, and the first predetermined combination is stored as history information. The winning probability may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. Further, the number of wins for each combination may be individually stored as history information, and the probability of winning may be calculated for each combination. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the winning probability of the combination to be managed.

Further, the total number of awarded game media and the total number of games played may be stored as history information, and the number of awarded game media per unit number of games may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the number of game media provided per unit number of games. Also, the combination of the total number of awarded game media and the total number of games is stored as history information individually for each of the game states ST1 to ST6 and the advantageous section, and the number of awarded game media per unit number of games is calculated. A configuration may be adopted in which individual calculations are performed for each of the game states ST1 to ST6 and each of the advantageous intervals.

Also, the number of transitions to the BB state ST2 and the total number of games played in the gaming states ST1, ST3 to ST6 that are not in the BB state ST2 are stored as history information, and the probability of transition to the BB state ST2 is calculated. may be Alternatively, the number of times of transition to RT state ST6 and the total number of games played in game states ST1 to ST5 other than RT state ST6 may be stored as history information, and the probability of transition to RT state ST6 may be calculated. good.

(33) The display of each determination result on the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 is configured to start when the check result display period is reached and end when the check result display period ends. good too. Further, when the sensor for detecting the opening of the front door 12 detects that the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11, the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 make the previous determinations. The display of the result is started, and when the sensor for detecting the opening of the front door 12 detects that the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11, the first to third notification display devices The display of each determination result in 85 to 87 may be terminated. In this case, it is possible to limit the period during which the display is performed on the first to third notification display devices 85-87.

(34) Although the remaining number of continuous games in the RT state ST6 is not reported, the remaining number of continuous games may be reported. Further, although the number of games continuously played during the advantageous period is not reported, the number of games continuously played may be reported. As a mode of executing the notification of the number of games, for example, the image display device 63 may be used, or a dedicated display section may be used.

(35) When the RT state ST6 ends, the continuation lottery process is executed, and if the continuation lottery process does not result in a continuation lottery, the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are not satisfied. However, in addition to or instead of this configuration, if one execution of RT state ST6 is performed until the number of games to be continued in RT state ST6 reaches the number of games corresponding to the end, the remaining execution times of RT state ST6 are stocked. It may be configured to be In this case, when one execution of the RT state ST6 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a stocked execution. may be decremented by 1 and a new execution cycle of the RT state ST6 may be started. In this configuration, when the advantageous interval ends and the advantageous interval initialization process is executed, the stock execution times may be cleared to "0". As a result, it is possible to set the transition condition for the RT state ST6 to a state in which it is not established at the end of the advantageous section.

(36) When the advantageous interval ends because the number of games continued in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous interval is set next time depending on whether or not the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 are satisfied at that time. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the degree of advantage is different in each case. For example, when the advantageous section ends due to reaching the upper limit number of games, if the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are satisfied, the The transition lottery process to RT state ST6 executed when setting the advantageous section may be configured to increase the probability of winning the transition, and the transition lottery process to RT state ST6 executed when setting the next advantageous section. A configuration may be adopted in which a high continuation rate is likely to be selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 when transition winning is made in . As a result, it is possible to compensate the player for the forced termination of the advantageous section by reaching the upper limit number of games.

(37) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the advantageous interval ends when the number of continuous games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, the result of the end lottery process executed in the advantageous interval is the end winning result. In this case, the advantageous section may end and the normal section may be started. The timing for executing this end lottery process is arbitrary, but for example, it may be configured such that the end lottery process is executed in each game. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the end lottery process is executed at the end. In addition, on the condition that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games, the end lottery process is executed each time a lottery opportunity occurs, and if the result of the end lottery process is the end winning result, it is advantageous. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the section ends and shifts to the normal section.

(38) In the advantageous section, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, so that the advantageous section is not limited to the configuration in which the advantageous section is more advantageous than the normal section. Advantageous sections may be more advantageous than normal sections by increasing the number of game media provided in the case, and the number of game media required to start one game may be reduced compared to normal sections. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the advantageous section is more advantageous.

(39) The notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration in which the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 are used. It is good also as a structure performed by doing. Further, in this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of events to be notified, the events to be notified of each type may be sequentially switched and displayed. When the display is sequentially switched in this way, for example, the type of event to be notified is displayed on the credit display section 65, and the calculation result of the event to be notified or the content of the calculation result is displayed on the combined display section 66. A configuration in which corresponding information is displayed may be adopted. As a result, even when there are a plurality of types of events to be notified, it is possible to notify the plurality of types of events to be notified using a small number of display units.

(40) A configuration may be adopted in which the upper limit of the number of continuous games is set for the normal section as well. In this case, when the number of games continuously executed in the normal section reaches the maximum number of games, the advantageous section is set even if the SB winning data is not set and the first BB winning is not established. Become. Also, in the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 executed when setting the advantageous section, it may be possible to ensure that the transition is won. As a result, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the normal section continues until the maximum number of games is reached. In addition, by setting the upper limit number of games in the normal section to be the same among the setting values of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", it is possible to prevent the setting value of the upper limit number of games from being advantageous or disadvantageous. It becomes possible.

(41) A configuration may be provided in which an operation unit is operated to forcibly bring the illumination devices 88a and 88b into the non-illumination state even when the front door 12 is in the open state. In this case, when illumination by the illumination devices 88a and 88b is unnecessary, the illumination devices 88a and 88b can be set to the non-illumination state. In addition, the operation unit may be configured to be provided at a position that can be operated even when the front door 12 is closed, and cannot be operated when the front door 12 is closed and can be operated when the front door 12 is opened. It may be configured to be provided at a position where it can be operated immediately.

(42) When the front door 12 is open, the illumination devices 88a and 88b are always illuminated, and when the front door 12 is closed, the illumination devices 88a and 88b are always non-illuminated. It is good also as composition which becomes.

(43) Even if the front door 12 changes from the closed state to the open state, the illumination devices 88a and 88b are maintained in the non-illumination state until the predetermined opening angle is reached, and after that, the predetermined opening angle or more is reached. The lighting devices 88a and 88b may be configured to be in the lighting state. In addition to this configuration, the illumination devices 88a and 88b may be configured to be in a non-illumination state when the front door 12 is at the maximum open position as in the above embodiment.

(44) A configuration may be adopted in which the intensity of the light emitted from the illumination devices 88a and 88b changes according to the opening angle of the front door 12. FIG. For example, when the front door 12 is closed, the illumination devices 88a and 88b are in a non-illumination state or a relatively weak illumination state, and when the front door 12 is open, the opening angle of the front door 12 is a predetermined opening. If the opening angle of the front door 12 is less than or equal to the angle, the illumination state is relatively strong, and if the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds the predetermined opening angle, the illumination state is relatively weak.

(45) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the effective line is only one main line ML, and the configuration may be such that the effective line is two, three, or four or more. In this case, the number of activated lines may increase as the number of betted game media increases, or the maximum number of activated lines may be set regardless of the number of betted game media.

(46) The type of information transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 is not limited to those in the above embodiments. Information on the number of game media played may be transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 . In this case, the information on the number of game media to be provided by winning can be notified on the image display device 63 or the like. Further, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, if the rotation of some of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped or stopped, the information corresponding to that is sent to the main side. It may be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 . In this case, the image display device 63 or the like can perform an effect corresponding to the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

(47) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the privilege of paying out medals is given when a minor win is established, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and a configuration in which some privilege is given to the player. If it is For example, it may be configured such that prizes other than medals are paid out when a minor win is established. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion and medal payout functions and that manages the medals owned by the player as credits, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of benefits.

(48) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B-type slot machine, a C-type, a combination of A and C types, a combination of B and C types, as well as RT games, CT games or AT machines. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type equipped with games.

(49) The symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., and may be geometric lines, figures, and the like. In addition, it is possible to compose a pattern by using light, color, etc., or by a three-dimensional shape, etc., or by combining them. In other words, the pattern may be anything as long as it functions as identifiable information.

(50) In each of the above-described embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 was shown, but the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which games are played using game balls as game media. You may apply it to the game machine of the form which fused with the machine.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. State transition for shifting a game state between a plurality of types of game states having different advantages (normal state ST1, BB state ST2, post-bonus state ST3, first preparation state ST4, second preparation state ST5, RT state ST6). Means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S704, S803, S902, S905, S906, S1002, S1005, S1007, S1307, S1602 and S1605 in the main MPU 72 , in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2402, S2405 and S2408 in the main MPU 72);
A first section setting means (a function of executing the end processing of the advantageous section in the main side MPU 72) for setting the game section to the first section (normal section);
Second section setting means for setting the game section to the second section (advantageous section) (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1404, S1411 and S1414 in the main side MPU 72, the sixth embodiment Then, the function of executing the processing of step S2804 in the main MPU 72);
with
One of the first section and the second section may provide the player with a benefit that does not occur in the other, or one of the first section and the second section may provide the player with a greater benefit than the other. easy configuration,
Both the first section and the second section are in a predetermined game state (first BB state, post-bonus state ST3, first preparation state ST4, second preparation state ST5 and RT state ST6) among the plurality of types of game states. ), wherein the other game states (normal state ST1, BB state ST2, post-bonus state ST3, first preparation state ST4, second preparation state ST5 and RT Any of the states ST6) is a configuration that can stay,
This game machine is
With at least one condition that the situation of the predetermined game state and the first section has occurred, the situation of the predetermined game state and the second section occurs, but the predetermined game state Unlike the case where the situation in the first section does not occur, related processing execution means (RT using tables for various states in the main side MPU 72) that enables related processing related to the player's profit to be executed a function of executing lottery processing for transition to state ST6, a function of executing lottery processing for transition to RT state ST6 using a table for RT state in main side MPU 72);
When a predetermined condition is established (the number of games continued in the advantageous section in the first BB state, the first preparation state ST4 or the second preparation state ST5 reaches the upper limit number of games, the post-bonus state after the end of the second BB state (shifting to ST3, shifting to RT state ST6 in a situation where the number of games continued in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of opportunity games) is the predetermined game state and the first section. occurs, and if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, a predetermined response means (main side MPU 72 negative determination at step S1413 a function to execute the process of step S1911 in the main MPU 72);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A1, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game by having a plurality of types of game states and a plurality of types of game intervals. In addition, one of the first section and the second section is configured to be more likely to receive benefits than the other, and both the first section and the second section are configured to be able to stay in the predetermined game state and other game states. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting an advantageous game state and an advantageous game section.

In this case, when the situation of the predetermined game state and the first section occurs, the situation of the predetermined game state and the second section occurs, but the situation of the predetermined game state and the first section occurs. Unlike the case where is not generated, related processing related to the player's profit can be executed, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a situation occurs in which the predetermined game state is the first section. As a result, the player expects that the predetermined condition will be satisfied and the state of the predetermined game state and the first section will occur, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

Feature A2. The related process execution means, when a specific event (the end of the first BB state, the setting of SB winning data) occurs in the predetermined game state and the first section, the The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that the related processing can be executed, unlike the case where the specific event occurs in the predetermined gaming state and the second section.

According to the feature A2, the related process is not surely executed when the predetermined game state is in the first section, but the specific event occurs in the predetermined game state in the first section. By doing so, the related processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to gradually change the target of the player's attention who expects execution of the related process, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the second interval setting means sets the game interval to the second interval when the specific event occurs in the first interval.

According to feature A3, when the specific event occurs in the first section in the predetermined game state, the second section in the predetermined game state is entered and the related process is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the occurrence of the specific event in the first section in the predetermined game state.

Feature A4. The gaming machine according to feature A2 or A3, wherein the occurrence of the specific event includes winning a specific combination in a combination lottery process.

According to feature A4, the player who expects the related process to be executed expects to win the specific combination in the combination lottery process in the first section in the predetermined game state. This makes it easier for the player who expects execution of the related process to understand the object to which attention should be paid.

Feature A5. It is possible to generate the predetermined game state or a situation in which transition to the predetermined game state is likely to occur based on the occurrence of the specific event in the other game state and the first section. means for executing the process (the first table for the normal state in the main MPU 72, the second table for the normal state, or the table for the first BB state, and the function of executing the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 ), the game machine according to any one of features A2 to A4.

According to the feature A5, it is possible to generate a predetermined game state or a situation in which transition to a predetermined game state is likely to occur based on the occurrence of a specific event in another game state and in the first section. is executed. Further, the related processing can be executed based on the occurrence of a specific event in the predetermined game state having the configuration of feature A2 and in the first section. As a result, it is possible to give the player the recognition that there is some advantage in the occurrence of the specific event in the situation of the first section. It is possible to increase the degree of attention.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, wherein the specific event is termination of the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature A6, the related process is executed when the state of the predetermined game state and the first section ends. This makes it easier for the player to understand the conditions for executing the related process.

Feature A7. Any one of the features A2 to A6, wherein the predetermined response means is characterized in that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the state is the predetermined game state from the start of the predetermined game state and the first section. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the characteristic A7, when the predetermined condition is established, the predetermined game state is in the first section from the start of the predetermined game state. Then, when a specific event occurs in that situation, a related process related to the player's profit can be executed. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the related process is executed.

Feature A8. In the situation of the predetermined game state and the second section, generation lottery processing (lottery processing for transition to RT state ST6 executed using the table for the first BB state in the main side MPU 72). A profit is given to the player as a result, and when the situation is the predetermined game state and the first section, the profit is given to the player by executing the related process after that. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized by:

According to the feature A8, in the situation of the second section in the predetermined game state, the profit is not given to the player unless the generation lottery process wins the occurrence, whereas in the situation of the first section in the predetermined game state, When it becomes true, the related processing is executed after that, and a profit is given to the player. As a result, a profit can be given even if the state of the first section or the state of the second section in the predetermined game state, and the degree of advantage for the state of the first section in the predetermined game state. can be increased.

Feature A9. In the second section, the privilege that does not occur in the first section can be granted to the player, or in the second section, the privilege is more likely to be granted to the player than in the first section. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8.

According to feature A9, the second section is more advantageous than the first section if only the game section is compared. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature A1, the state of the predetermined game state and the first section is different from the state of the predetermined game state and the second section, and the player's profit is improved. Associated processing may be performed. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the game is in the predetermined game state and in the first section.

Feature A10. The state transition means is configured to shift the game state from the other game state to the predetermined game state when a predetermined transition opportunity (establishment of a second promotion replay prize) occurs in the other game state,
When the other game state is the second section, the predetermined transition opportunity occurs, and when the other game state is the first section, the predetermined transition opportunity does not occur, or Characteristic features A1 to A1, characterized in that the predetermined transition opportunity is more likely to occur in the case of another game state in the second section than in the case of the other game state in the first section. The gaming machine according to any one of A9.

According to the feature A10, when the game state is the first section in another game state, the transition to the predetermined game state does not occur or is unlikely to occur. people will expect. On the other hand, in the case of the predetermined game state and the first section, a related process related to the player's profit can be executed. As a result, it is possible to change the type of game section that the player expects to occur according to the type of game state, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the first section and the second section.

Feature A11. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of games executed in the second section reaches a predetermined number of games.

According to the characteristic A11, when the number of games executed in the second interval reaches the predetermined number of games, the predetermined game state is in the first interval, and in this situation, the player's profit is increased. Associated processing may be performed. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the number of games executed in the second interval.

Feature A12. A second interval end means (in the first embodiment, the main side MPU 72 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment) ends the second interval based on the number of games continuously executed in the second interval reaching the upper limit number of games. A function of executing the process of step S1911, a function of executing the process of step S2611 in the main side MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment),
The predetermined condition is fulfilled based on the occurrence of a shift to the predetermined gaming state in a state in which the number of games continuously executed in the state of the second section is within the range from the predetermined number of games to the upper limit number of games. The gaming machine according to feature A11, characterized in that:

According to feature A12, the second interval ends when the number of games continuously executed in the second interval reaches the upper limit number of games, so the second interval does not continue excessively. On the other hand, it is unfortunate that the number of games reaches the maximum number of games for the player who wishes to continue the second interval. On the other hand, if the number of games continuously executed in the second interval is within the range from the predetermined number of games to the upper limit number of games, and the transition to the predetermined game state occurs, the predetermined game state is reached. , a situation occurs in the first interval, and when the situation occurs, related processing related to the player's profit can be executed. As a result, even if the number of games continued in the second interval approaches the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from being lowered.

Feature A13. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, wherein the predetermined condition is established based on the establishment of the end condition of the second section in the predetermined game state.

According to the feature A13, when the predetermined game state is the second section and the end condition for the second section is met, the predetermined game state is the first section. Then, in that situation, related actions related to the player's interests may be executed. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the end condition of the second section is satisfied in the middle of the predetermined game state, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A14. A second interval end means (the main MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment) that ends the second interval based on the fact that the number of games continuously executed in the second interval reaches the upper limit number of games function to execute the process of step S3010),
Any of the features A1 to A13, wherein the predetermined condition is established based on the number of games continuously executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games in the predetermined gaming state. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to feature A14, the second interval ends when the number of games continuously executed in the second interval reaches the upper limit number of games, so the second interval does not continue excessively. On the other hand, it is unfortunate that the number of games reaches the maximum number of games for the player who wishes to continue the second interval. On the other hand, if the number of games continuously executed in the state of the second section reaches the upper limit number of games in the predetermined game state, the state of the predetermined game state is the first section, and this state is reached. If so, then related actions related to the player's interests may be executed. As a result, even if the number of games continued in the second interval approaches the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from being lowered.

Feature A15. The state transition means is configured to shift the game state from the other game state to the predetermined game state when a predetermined transition opportunity (establishment of a second promotion replay prize) occurs in the other game state,
Any one of the characteristics A11 to A14, characterized in that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the predetermined transition opportunity while allowing the player to stay in the other game state based on the player's operation in the other game state. The game machine described.

According to feature A15, it is possible to delay the transition timing to the predetermined game state by the player's operation. Then, having the configuration of any one of the features A11 to A14, a predetermined condition is satisfied in relation to the number of games executed in the second section, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game state is the predetermined game state and the second game is played. It becomes a situation of one section. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to generate a situation in which the predetermined game state is the first section by the player's own operation.

Feature A16. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
When the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the pattern is started to be displayed in a variable manner, and when the stop operation means is operated, the pattern is stopped to be displayed in a variable manner. Pattern display control means for controlling the display means (function for executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the pattern, execution of the control corresponding to the winning combination as the establishment of the prize corresponding to the winning combination. Means (a function of executing a winning determination process, a medium provision process, and a corresponding process at the end of the game in the main MPU 72);
with
The corresponding execution means performs a predetermined corresponding combination (in the first to seventh embodiments, an index value IV in which the first promotion replay winning data is set and the second promotion replay winning data is set) in the lottery process of the combination. Index value IV, in the eighth embodiment, the index value IV to which the bell winning data is set, the index value IV to which the first promotion replay winning data is set, and the index value IV to which the second promotion replay winning data is set. Predetermined response execution means for executing control corresponding to the fact that the operation mode for stopping the variable display of the pattern has become a predetermined mode (function for executing the processing of steps S905 and S1005 in the main MPU 72) ),
The game machine corresponds to one of the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process for the combination in the second section. Characteristic features A1 to A15 characterized by comprising notification control means (function for executing notification control processing in the main side MPU 72, function for executing notification processing in the effect side MPU 92) for executing predetermined notification. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to feature A16, in the second section, when a predetermined corresponding combination is won in the winning lottery process, the predetermined notification is executed. can be obtained. In this case, with the configuration of feature A1, the related process can be executed by being in the predetermined game state and in the first section, thereby increasing the player's attention to the first section. It becomes possible.

For the configuration of features A1 to A16, any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C21, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. Predetermined benefits (in the first to seventh embodiments, notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of the first promotion replay winning and the reel 32L that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay winning, Notification of the stop order of reels 32M and 32R, notification of the stop order of reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enable establishment of a bell prize in the eighth embodiment, and notification of the stop order of reels 32L and 32M that enable establishment of a first promotion replay prize. , 32R, and notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable establishment of the second promotion replay prize) are set in the advantageous interval provided to the player (first In the embodiment of the main MPU 72, the function of executing the processing of steps S1404, S1411 and S1414; in the sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2804 in the main MPU 72);
Advantageous section ending means (a function for executing advantageous section ending processing in the main MPU 72) for executing the advantageous section ending process based on occurrence of an end trigger in the advantageous section situation;
When the predetermined game state (RT state ST6) is started, the end processing is executed or the predetermined game state (first BB state, post-bonus state ST3, first preparation state ST4, second preparation state ST5 and RT state ST6) and the end processing is executed in the advantageous interval under at least one condition that the end processing is executed in the advantageous interval. Unlike the case where the predetermined game state ends without being executed, related processing execution means (RT using tables for various states in the main side MPU 72) that enables related processing related to the player's profit to be executed. a function of executing lottery processing for transition to state ST6, a function of executing lottery processing for transition to RT state ST6 using a table for RT state in main side MPU 72);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B1, when the predetermined game state is started, the end processing of the advantageous section is executed, or the end processing of the advantageous section is executed in the middle of the state where the predetermined game state is the advantageous section. A related process related to the player's interests may be executed with at least one condition of Thus, even when the predetermined game state is started or the end processing of the advantageous section is executed in the middle of the predetermined game state, the player's sense of loss due to the end of the advantageous section is compensated for by executing the related processing. becomes possible. Also, the player who expects the related process to be executed expects the advantageous section end process to be executed when the predetermined game state is started or in the middle of the predetermined game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the termination opportunity occurs under at least one condition that the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number of games.

According to feature B2, the advantageous interval ending process is executed under at least one condition that the number of games executed in the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined number of games. Then, when the predetermined game state is started or when the advantageous section end processing is executed in the middle of the predetermined game state, as at least one condition, the related processing related to the profit of the player can be executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the number of games executed in the advantageous section.

Feature B3. The advantageous section ending means is
As the termination trigger, means for executing the termination process (in the first embodiment, the main MPU 72 a function of making an affirmative determination in step S1910 and executing the process of step S1911, a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2610 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment and executing the process of step S2611;
The termination opportunity is based on occurrence of a transition to the predetermined gaming state in a situation where the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous zone is within the range from the predetermined number of games to the upper limit number of games. , a means for executing the end processing (in the first embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step S1913 in the main MPU 72 and executing the processing in step S1911; in the fourth embodiment, the main MPU 72 performs a function of making an affirmative determination and executing the processing of step S2611);
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B3, the advantageous interval ends when the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, so that the advantageous interval does not continue excessively. On the other hand, it is unfortunate that the number of games reaches the maximum number of games for the player who wishes to continue the advantageous section. On the other hand, if the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section is within the range from the predetermined number of games to the upper limit number of games, and the transition to the predetermined gaming state occurs, the advantageous section By executing the termination process, related processes related to the player's profit can be executed. As a result, even if the number of games continued in the advantageous section approaches the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from being lowered.

Feature B4. A state transition means (main function to execute the processing of step S1005 in the side MPU 72),
The gaming machine according to feature B2 or B3, characterized in that it is possible for the player to stay in the other game state while preventing the occurrence of the predetermined transition opportunity based on the player's operation in the other game state. .

According to feature B4, it is possible to delay the transition timing to the predetermined game state by the player's operation. In addition, when the predetermined game state is started in relation to the number of games executed in the advantageous interval, or in the middle of the predetermined game state, the advantage interval end processing is executed, and the configuration of the feature B2 or B3 is provided. Related processing may be performed that relates to the interests of This makes it possible for the player's own operation to generate a situation in which the related process can be executed.

Feature B5. The related processing execution means, when a specific event (the end of the first BB state, the setting of SB winning data) occurs in the predetermined gaming state but not in the advantageous section, the predetermined The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that the related processing can be executed unlike the case where the specific event occurs in the gaming state and the advantageous interval. .

According to the feature B5, if the state is the predetermined game state but not the advantageous section, the related processing is not surely executed, but the specific event occurs in the predetermined game state but not the advantageous section. associated processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to gradually change the target of the player's attention who expects execution of the related process, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B6. The advantageous interval end means is characterized by executing the end processing when the predetermined game state is started based on the occurrence of the end opportunity when the predetermined game state is started. The gaming machine described in B5.

According to the characteristic B6, when the predetermined game state is started and the end opportunity is generated, the state is the predetermined game state from the start of the predetermined game state and it is not an advantageous section, so it is only It is possible to increase the probability that a specific event will occur in the situation.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein the advantageous interval setting means sets the game interval to the advantageous interval when the specific event occurs in a non-advantageous interval (normal interval). .

According to the characteristic B7, when the specific event occurs in the predetermined game state and the non-advantageous section, the predetermined game state and the advantageous section are executed and the related process is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the occurrence of the specific event in the non-advantageous section in the predetermined game state.

Feature B8. The game according to any one of features B5 to B7, wherein the occurrence of the specific event includes winning a specific combination (index value IV in which SB winning data is set) in a combination lottery process. machine.

According to the feature B8, the player who expects the execution of the related process expects to win the specific combination in the combination lottery process in the predetermined game state and not in the advantageous section. This makes it easier for the player who expects execution of the related process to understand the object to which attention should be paid.

Feature B9. It is possible to generate a predetermined game state or a situation in which transition to the predetermined game state is likely to occur based on the occurrence of the specific event in another game state but not in the advantageous section. A means for executing processing (a function of executing lottery processing for transition to RT state ST6 using the first table for normal state, second table for normal state, or table for first BB state in main side MPU 72) The game machine according to any one of features B5 to B8, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B9, it is possible to generate a predetermined game state or a situation in which a transition to a predetermined game state is likely to occur based on the occurrence of a specific event in another game state and not in an advantageous section. process is executed. In addition, the related processing can be executed based on the occurrence of a specific event in a predetermined game state having the configuration of feature B5 and not in an advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to give the player recognition that there is some advantage in the occurrence of the specific event in a situation that is not an advantageous section, and the player's attention to the occurrence of the specific event in a situation that is not an advantageous section. can be increased.

Feature B10. The game machine according to any one of features B5 to B9, wherein the specific event is termination of the predetermined game state.

According to the feature B10, the related process is executed when the situation in which the game is in the predetermined game state and not in the advantageous section ends. This makes it easier for the player to understand the conditions for executing the related process.

Feature B11. In the situation of the predetermined game state and the advantageous section, the generation lottery process (the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed using the table for the first BB state in the main side MPU 72) is generated and won. By doing so, a profit is given to the player, and when the situation is the predetermined game state but not the advantageous section, the profit is given to the player by executing the related process after that. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10.

According to the feature B11, in a situation in which the predetermined gaming state is in an advantageous section, the player is not provided with a profit unless the occurrence lottery process results in a winning, whereas the predetermined gaming state is in a situation in which it is not in an advantageous section. In some cases, a profit is given to the player by executing related processing after that. As a result, it is possible to give a profit regardless of whether the predetermined game state is in a non-advantageous section or in an advantageous section, and at the same time, the degree of advantage for a situation in which the predetermined game state is in a non-advantageous section is determined. can be increased.

Feature B12. The state transition means is configured to shift the game state from the other game state to the predetermined game state when a predetermined transition opportunity (establishment of a second promotion replay prize) occurs in the other game state,
The predetermined transition opportunity occurs when the other game state is in the advantageous section, and the predetermined transition opportunity does not occur when the other game state is not in the advantageous section, or the other Any of the characteristics B1 to B11, characterized in that the predetermined transition opportunity is more likely to occur when the game state is the advantageous interval than when the other game state is not the advantageous interval. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature B12, when the game state is in another game state and not in the advantageous section, the transition to the predetermined game state does not occur or is unlikely to occur. It will be expected. On the other hand, when the game is in the predetermined game state and not in the advantageous section, related processing relating to the player's profit can be executed. As a result, it is possible to change the type of game section that the player expects to occur according to the type of game state, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section. .

Feature B13. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
When the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the pattern is started to be displayed in a variable manner, and when the stop operation means is operated, the pattern is stopped to be displayed in a variable manner. Pattern display control means for controlling the display means (function for executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the pattern, execution of the control corresponding to the winning combination as the establishment of the prize corresponding to the winning combination. Means (a function of executing a winning determination process, a medium provision process, and a corresponding process at the end of the game in the main MPU 72);
with
The corresponding execution means performs a predetermined corresponding combination (in the first to seventh embodiments, an index value IV in which the first promotion replay winning data is set and the second promotion replay winning data is set) in the lottery process of the combination. Index value IV, in the eighth embodiment, the index value IV to which the bell winning data is set, the index value IV to which the first promotion replay winning data is set, and the index value IV to which the second promotion replay winning data is set. Predetermined response execution means for executing control corresponding to the fact that the operation mode for stopping the variable display of the pattern has become a predetermined mode (function for executing the processing of steps S905 and S1005 in the main MPU 72) ),
In the game machine, when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process for the combination in the advantageous section, a predetermined mode corresponding to one of the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from occurring is selected. Features B1 to B12 characterized by comprising a notification control means for executing notification (a function of executing notification control processing in the main side MPU 72, a function of executing notification processing in the effect side MPU 92) 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the feature B13, in the advantageous section, when a predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process, the predetermined notification is executed. can be obtained. In this case, with the configuration of the feature B1, the related processing can be executed when the state is the predetermined game state but not the advantageous section, thereby increasing the player's attention to the section which is not the advantageous section. becomes possible.

For the configuration of features B1 to B13, any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C21, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. State transition for shifting a game state between a plurality of types of game states having different advantages (normal state ST1, BB state ST2, post-bonus state ST3, first preparation state ST4, second preparation state ST5, RT state ST6). Means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S704, S803, S902, S905, S906, S1002, S1005, S1007, S1307, S1602 and S1605 in the main MPU 72 , in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2402, S2405 and S2408 in the main MPU 72);
Second section setting means (first execution a function of executing the processing of step S1411 in the main MPU 72 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2804 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment;
with
It is a configuration that can stay in the second section in a plurality of types of game states,
This gaming machine executes the profit giving process in a manner corresponding to the gaming state at that time in a predetermined trigger game included in the second section, which is a game subsequent to the game in which the specific event occurs. A game machine characterized by comprising process execution means (a function of executing a lottery process for shifting to RT state ST6 in a main MPU 72).

According to the feature C1, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game by having a plurality of types of game states and a plurality of types of game intervals. In this case, when a specific event occurs in the first interval, not only is the second interval set, but also the profit giving process is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of the specific event in the first section. Also, the profit giving process is executed in a predetermined trigger game included in the second section, which is a game subsequent to the game in which the specific event occurred. As a result, the difference between the first section and the second section is made clear such that the first section is a section in which the profit giving process is not executed and the second section is a section in which the profit giving process can be executed. It becomes possible to Also, the profit giving process is executed in a mode corresponding to the gaming state at that time in a predetermined trigger game included in the second section, which is a game subsequent to the game in which the specific event occurred. As a result, the player pays attention not only to the occurrence of the specific event in the first section, but also to the type of game state in the subsequent second section. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the process executing means varies the probability of determining the award of the profit in the profit awarding process according to the gaming state of the predetermined opportunity game.

According to the feature C2, the probability that a profit is awarded in the profit granting process differs depending on the type of gaming state in the predetermined trigger game. Attention will be paid to the type of game state in the second interval after the occurrence of the specific event.

Feature C3. The game state at the time when the specific event occurs in the first section and the game state at the time of the predetermined trigger game in the second section set based on the occurrence of the specific event may be different. The gaming machine according to the characterizing feature C1 or C2.

According to feature C3, the player pays attention not only to the game state in the first section, but also to the game state in the second section after the specific event occurs in the first section.

Feature C4. The process execution means determines whether or not to shift to an advantageous game state (RT state ST6) that is advantageous to the player, or whether or not to shift to a state where the advantageous game state can easily be reached, as the profit giving process. It executes the decision process to
The state transition means is characterized in that it shifts to the advantageous game state or a state that facilitates transition to the advantageous game state based on the fact that the transition decision is made in the determination process. The gaming machine according to any one of C3.

According to the feature C4, there is a possibility that the occurrence of the specific event in the first section will trigger the advantageous gaming state and the second section. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of the specific event in the first section.

Feature C5. The process executing means may set, as at least one condition, that the game state in the predetermined trigger game is a specific game state (normal state ST1), and the profit giving process may not decide to give a profit. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized by:

According to the feature C5, if the gaming state in the predetermined trigger game is the specific gaming state, the provision of the profit is not determined, so even if the specific event occurs in the first section and is set in the second section It is possible to create a situation in which no profit is given.

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the predetermined trigger game is the first game to be started in the second section set for the occurrence of the specific event.

According to the feature C6, when the second section is set, the profit giving process can be executed early.

Feature C7. Means (in the first embodiment, step S1901 in the main MPU 72, step A function of executing the processes of S1904, S1905, S1910 and S1913; in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of S2601, S2604, S2605, S2610 and S2613 in the main MPU 72; In the eighth embodiment, the main MPU 72 performs the processing of steps S3201, S3206, S3207, and S3213. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that it has a function to execute.

According to the feature C7, it is possible to end the second section in a mode corresponding to the result of the profit giving process, and it is possible to associate the result of the profit giving process with the continuation mode of the second section.

Feature C8. If the result of the profit giving process executed for the setting of the second section is a result that does not correspond to the giving of profit, the profit giving process executed for the setting of the second section Means (in the first embodiment, a step in the main side MPU 72 that makes the number of games to be executed in the second section smaller or more likely to be smaller than when the result is a result corresponding to the award of profit A function of executing the processes of S1904 to S1906, a function of executing the processes of steps S2604 to S2606 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, and a process of steps S3206 to S3209 in the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment. A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the feature C8, it is possible to prevent the second section from continuing unnecessarily long in a situation where no profit is given.

Feature C9. When the result of the profit giving process executed corresponding to the setting of the second interval is a result not corresponding to the giving of profit, the gaming state in the predetermined opportunity game in which the profit giving process was executed According to any one of the features C1 to C8, characterized in that means for changing the end condition of the second section according to the type of game machine.

According to feature C9, even in a situation where no profit is given, the second section can be ended in a mode corresponding to the type of gaming state at that time, and the result of the profit giving process and the profit giving process It is possible to associate the continuation mode of the second section with the combination with the gaming state when is executed.

Feature C10. Means for enabling the second interval to be completed in the shortest number of games when the result of the profit giving process executed corresponding to the setting of the second interval does not correspond to the giving of the profit. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1904 to S1906 in the main MPU 72; in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2604 to S2606 in the main MPU 72; The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics C1 to C9, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of steps S3206 to S3209 in the main side MPU 72).

According to the feature C10, it is possible to minimize the number of games in which the second section continues in a situation where no profit is awarded. As a result, it is possible to prevent the total number of staying games in the second section from being unnecessarily long.

Feature C11. If the result of the profit granting process executed corresponding to the setting of the second interval is a result that does not correspond to the granting of the profit, the above-mentioned Means for ending the second interval (function for executing the processing of steps S1904 to S1906 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and executing the processing in steps S2604 to S2606 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment function, in the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3206 to S3209 in the main side MPU 72).

According to the characteristic C11, it is possible to minimize the number of games in which the second section continues in a situation where no profit is awarded.

Feature C12. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, wherein the profit giving process is not executed even if the specific event occurs in the second interval.

According to the feature C12, the profit giving process is executed when the specific event occurs in the first interval, whereas the profit giving process is not executed even if the specific event occurs in the second interval. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the roles of the first section and the second section.

Feature C13. The state transition means shifts from the specific state to another game state (first preparation state ST4) under at least one condition that the specific event occurs in a situation where the game state is the specific state (post-bonus state ST3). It is intended to migrate
The process execution means is configured to determine, when the profit giving process is executed in response to the occurrence of the specific event in the specific state, the profit giving process in the profit giving process. The game machine according to any one of the characterizing features C1 to C12.

According to the feature C13, when the specific state is entered, the transition to another game state does not occur unless the specific event occurs, and when the profit giving process is executed with the occurrence of the specific event in the specific state as a trigger. is determined to grant profits. As a result, the probability of receiving a benefit increases when the specific state occurs. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of the specific state.

Feature C14. When the first special game state (second BB state), which is advantageous to the player, ends, the subsequent situation is the specific state and the first section. function to execute).

According to the feature C14, when the first special game state is reached, not only is it advantageous to the player, but also after the end of the first special game state, the specific state is the first section. As a result, the probability of receiving a profit increases. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of the first special game state.

Feature C15. The profit giving process is not executed even if the specific event occurs in the second interval,
When the second special game state (first BB state), which is advantageous to the player, ends, the subsequent situation is the specific state and the second section (the process of step S1714 in the main MPU 72 is function to execute).

According to the characteristic C15, when the second special game state is reached, it is advantageous to the player, but after the end of the second special game state, the specific state is the second section, and , the profit giving process is not executed even if a specific event occurs in the second interval. As a result, it is possible to give a difference in the degree of advantage with respect to the profit provision probability between the first special game state and the second special game state, both of which are advantageous to the player.

Feature C16. The gaming machine according to feature C15, wherein the profit giving process is not executed in the first special game state, and the profit giving process can be executed in the second special game state.

According to the feature C16, since the profit giving process is executed in the second special game state, it is possible to give the opportunity to give the profit even in the second special game state.

Feature C17. The game according to any one of features C1 to C16, wherein the occurrence of the specific event includes winning a specific combination (index value IV in which SB winning data is set) in a combination lottery process. machine.

According to the feature C17, the player who expects the execution of the profit giving process expects to win the specific combination in the lottery process of the combination in the situation of the first section. This makes it easier for the player who expects the execution of the profit giving process to understand the object to which attention should be paid.

Feature C18. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C17, wherein the probability of occurrence of the specific event is constant among a plurality of stages of set values that give a difference in the advantage of the gaming machine.

According to the feature C18, it is possible to make the probability of shifting from the first section to the second section constant between the set values of the multiple stages.

Feature C19. One of the first section and the second section may provide the player with a benefit that does not occur in the other, or one of the first section and the second section may provide the player with a greater benefit than the other. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C18, characterized in that it has an easy configuration.

According to the feature C19, the player plays the game in anticipation of an advantageous game section.

Feature C20. Characteristic C1 characterized in that a privilege that does not occur in the first segment can be given to the player in the second segment, or that a privilege is more likely to be given to the player in the second segment than in the first segment. The gaming machine according to any one of A19.

According to the feature C20, the second section is more advantageous than the first section if only the game section is compared. In this case, by having the configuration of the feature C1, the profit giving process is executed when a specific event occurs in the situation of the first interval. This makes it possible to increase the attention of the player to the situation in the first section.

Feature C21. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
When the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the pattern is started to be displayed in a variable manner, and when the stop operation means is operated, the pattern is stopped to be displayed in a variable manner. Pattern display control means for controlling the display means (function for executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the pattern, execution of the control corresponding to the winning combination as the establishment of the prize corresponding to the winning combination. Means (a function of executing a winning determination process, a medium provision process, and a corresponding process at the end of the game in the main MPU 72);
with
The corresponding execution means performs a predetermined corresponding combination (in the first to seventh embodiments, an index value IV in which the first promotion replay winning data is set and the second promotion replay winning data is set) in the lottery process of the combination. Index value IV, in the eighth embodiment, the index value IV to which the bell winning data is set, the index value IV to which the first promotion replay winning data is set, and the index value IV to which the second promotion replay winning data is set. Predetermined response execution means for executing control corresponding to the fact that the operation mode for stopping the variable display of the pattern has become a predetermined mode (function for executing the processing of steps S905 and S1005 in the main MPU 72) ),
The game machine corresponds to one of the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process for the combination in the second section. Features C1 to C20 characterized by having notification control means (function for executing notification control processing in main side MPU 72, function for executing notification processing in effect side MPU 92) for executing predetermined notification. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature C21, in the second section, when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the winning lottery process, the predetermined notification is executed. can be obtained. In this case, the configuration of the feature C1 is provided, and the profit giving process can be executed by the occurrence of the specific event in the first section, thereby making it possible to increase the player's attention to the first section. .

For the configuration of features C1 to C21, any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C21, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Advantageous interval setting means for setting the game interval as an advantageous interval (function for executing the processing of steps S1404, S1411 and S1414 in the main side MPU 72 in the first embodiment, step S2804 in the main side MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment function to execute the processing of
An advantageous gaming state (RT state ST6) that is advantageous to the player in the advantageous section, or a state in which it is easy to transition to the advantageous gaming state (second preparation state ST5 and condition for transition to RT state ST6 is satisfied). State transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S905 and S1005 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning to
Advantageous section ending means (a function for executing advantageous section ending processing in the main MPU 72) for executing the advantageous section ending process based on occurrence of an end trigger in the advantageous section situation;
with
A gaming machine characterized in that there are a plurality of types of the end trigger.

According to the feature D1, since a transition to an advantageous gaming state or a state in which it is easy to transition to an advantageous gaming state occurs in an advantageous section, whether or not a player expecting a transition to an advantageous gaming state is set to an advantageous section. attention will be paid to. In this case, it is possible to diversify the mode of ending the advantageous section by providing a plurality of types of termination triggers for executing the advantageous section termination process. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2. The state transition means, when the end processing is executed, terminates the advantageous game state or shifts to a state in which a new transition to the advantageous game state is unlikely to occur. game machine.

According to the feature D2, when the advantageous section ends, the advantageous game state ends, or the state shifts to a state in which a new transition to the advantageous game state is unlikely to occur. Therefore, the player pays attention to when the advantageous section ends. In this case, since there are a plurality of types of triggers for ending the advantageous interval, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the advantageous interval ends, which the player is interested in, and to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the termination trigger includes that the number of games executed in the advantageous section reaches an upper limit number of games.

According to feature D3, the advantageous interval ends when the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, so that the advantageous interval does not continue excessively. can do.

Feature D4. The advantageous section ending means is
First termination means for ending the advantageous interval based on the fact that the number of games executed in the advantageous interval reaches the maximum number of games and execute the process of step S1911, in the fourth embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step S2610 in the main MPU 72 and executing the process of step S2611);
Second termination means (first execution In the fourth embodiment, the main MPU 72 makes an affirmative determination in step S2613 and executes the processing in step S2611. function), and the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

According to the feature D4, it is possible to diversify the trigger for ending the advantageous interval in relation to the number of games executed in the advantageous interval. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the number of games executed in the advantageous section.

Feature D5. The second ending means terminates the advantageous interval based on the occurrence of the transition to the advantageous gaming state in a situation where the number of games executed in the advantageous interval is within a predetermined number of games. The gaming machine according to feature D4, characterized by:

According to the characteristic D5, when the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in a situation in which the number of games executed in the situation of the advantageous section is within the predetermined number of games, the game is executed in the situation of the advantageous section. Even if the number of games does not reach the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section is ended. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the transition timing to the advantageous gaming state with respect to the number of games executed in the advantageous section.

Feature D6. With at least one condition that the situation is the advantageous gaming state but not the advantageous section, the situation that the advantageous gaming state is the advantageous section occurs, but the advantageous gaming state is the advantageous gaming state. Unlike the case where a situation other than the interval does not occur, related processing execution means (RT state ST6 using various state tables in the main side MPU 72) that enables related processing related to the player's profit to be executed and a function of executing the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 using the RT state table in the main MPU 72). .

According to feature D6, although the number of games executed in the situation of the advantageous interval has not reached the upper limit number of games, the advantageous interval has ended due to the timing of transition to the advantageous gaming state. However, since related processing relating to the player's benefit can be executed in response to this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disadvantaged by the occurrence of such an event.

Feature D7. a processing execution means (function for executing lottery processing for shifting to RT state ST6 in main side MPU 72) for executing profit giving processing based on being set in the advantageous section;
Means (in the first embodiment, steps S1901, S1904, and A function of executing the processes of steps S1905, S1910 and S1913, a function of executing the processes of steps S2601, S2604, S2605, S2610 and S2613 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, the seventh embodiment In the eighth embodiment, the main MPU 72 executes the processing of steps S3201, S3206, S3207, and S3213. function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D7, it is possible to end the advantageous section in a mode corresponding to the result of the profit giving process, and it is possible to associate the result of the profit giving process with the end mode of the advantageous section.

Feature D8. The processing execution means executes, as the profit giving processing, determination processing for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous gaming state or whether or not to shift to a state that facilitates shifting to the advantageous gaming state. ,
The feature D7 is characterized in that the state transition means shifts to the advantageous game state or a state that facilitates transition to the advantageous game state based on the fact that the transition is determined in the determination process. The game machine described.

According to the feature D8, the timing for ending the advantageous section changes depending on whether or not there is a transition to an advantageous game state or a state that facilitates transition to an advantageous game state. This makes it possible to end the advantageous section in a manner suitable for each situation.

Feature D9. The result of the profit giving process executed for the setting of the advantageous interval corresponds to the giving of profit (announcement of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling establishment of the first promotion replay prize) , means for continuing the advantageous section until at least the benefit is given (in the first embodiment, the function of making a negative determination in step S1905 in the main MPU 72; In the embodiment, a function of making a negative determination in step S2605 in the main MPU 72; in the seventh embodiment, a function of making a negative determination in step S3005 in the main MPU 72; A gaming machine according to feature D7 or D8, characterized by comprising a function of making a negative determination.

According to feature D9, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from ending in the middle of the decision to give the profit.

Feature D10. If the result of the profit granting process executed for the setting of the advantageous interval is a result that does not correspond to the granting of profit, the result of the profit granting process executed for the setting of the advantageous interval is Means for making the number of games to be executed in the advantageous section smaller or more likely to be smaller than in the case of the result corresponding to the provision of profit (function of making affirmative determination in step S1905 in the main MPU 72, In the fourth embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step S2605 in the main MPU 72; in the seventh embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step S2605 in the main MPU 72; A gaming machine according to any one of features D7 to D9, characterized by comprising a function of making an affirmative determination in step S3207.

According to the feature D10, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from continuing unnecessarily long in a situation where no profit is given.

Feature D11. If the result of the profit giving process executed corresponding to the setting of the advantageous interval is a result that does not correspond to the giving of profit, depending on the type of gaming state in the game in which the profit giving process is executed Means for differentiating the end timing of the advantageous section (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1901 to S1907 in the main MPU 72; in the fourth embodiment, the main MPU 72 in steps S2601 to S2607 function of executing processing, function of executing the processing of steps S3001 to S3007 in the main MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment, and function of executing the processing of steps S3201 to S3211 in the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment) The gaming machine according to any one of features D7 to D10, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D11, it is possible to end the advantageous section in a mode corresponding to the type of gaming state at that time even in a situation where no profit is given, and the result of the profit giving process and the profit giving process can be completed. It is possible to associate the end mode of the advantageous section with the combination with the game state in the case of execution.

Feature D12. Means (mainly The function of making an affirmative determination in step S1905 in the side MPU 72, the function of making an affirmative determination in step S2605 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, and the function of making an affirmative determination in step S2605 in the main MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment. function, and in the eighth embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step S3207 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature D12, it is possible to minimize the number of games in which the advantageous section continues in a situation where no profit is awarded. As a result, it is possible to prevent the total number of staying games in the advantageous section from being unnecessarily long.

Feature D13. When the result of the profit giving process executed corresponding to the setting of the advantageous section is a result not corresponding to the giving of profit, the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the profit giving process was executed. Means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S1905 in the main MPU 72, a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2605 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, and a function in step S2605 in the main MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment A game machine according to any one of features D7 to D12, characterized by comprising a function of making an affirmative determination.

According to the feature D13, it is possible to minimize the number of games in which the advantageous section continues in a situation where no profit is awarded.

For the configuration of features D1 to D13, any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C21, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
When the start operation means is operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the pattern is started to be displayed in a variable manner, and when the stop operation means is operated, the pattern is stopped to be displayed in a variable manner. Pattern display control means for controlling the display means (function for executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the pattern, execution of the control corresponding to the winning combination as the establishment of the prize corresponding to the winning combination. Means (a function of executing a winning determination process, a medium provision process, and a corresponding process at the end of the game in the main MPU 72);
with
The corresponding execution means performs a predetermined corresponding combination (in the first to seventh embodiments, an index value IV in which the first promotion replay winning data is set and the second promotion replay winning data is set) in the lottery process of the combination. Index value IV, in the eighth embodiment, the index value IV to which the bell winning data is set, the index value IV to which the first promotion replay winning data is set, and the index value IV to which the second promotion replay winning data is set. Predetermined response execution means for executing control corresponding to the fact that the operation mode for stopping the variable display of the pattern has become a predetermined mode (function for executing the processing of steps S905 and S1005 in the main MPU 72) ) in a game machine equipped with
When the game section is an advantageous section, a predetermined mode corresponding to one of the predetermined mode and a mode for preventing the predetermined mode from occurring when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process for the combination. Notification control means for executing notification (function for executing notification control processing in the main side MPU 72, function for executing notification processing in the effect side MPU 92);
Restriction setting means for setting restriction conditions in the advantageous section (function for executing the processing of steps S1306 and S1506 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and the processing of step S2511 in the main MPU 72 in the third embodiment. function to execute, a function to execute the processing of step S2707 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment, and a function to execute the processing of step S2906 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment),
The notification control means is characterized in that, when the limited situation is set even in the advantageous section, the predetermined notification is not executed even if the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process for the combination. game machine.

According to the feature E1, when the game section becomes an advantageous section and the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the winning lottery process, the predetermined notification is executed, so the player performs the stop operation in a manner corresponding to the predetermined notification. It is possible to do As a result, the player expects that the game section will be an advantageous section, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In this case, when the restricted condition is set, the predetermined notification is not executed even in the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the predetermined notification is not executed even in the advantageous section, and it is possible to suitably control the game section.

Feature E2. A processing execution means (function for executing lottery processing for transition to RT state ST6 in main side MPU 72) for executing profit giving processing based on being set in the advantageous section,
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the limit setting means sets the limit condition when the result of the profit giving process does not correspond to the giving of the profit.

According to feature E2, since the profit giving process is executed based on the fact that the game section is set as the advantageous section, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game section becoming the advantageous section. In this case, if the result of the profit giving process does not correspond to the giving of the profit, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined notification by setting the restriction status. Even if the result corresponding to is not obtained, it is possible to create a situation in which the game section is maintained in the advantageous section.

Feature E3. Advantageous interval setting means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1414 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the game interval to the advantageous interval when the transition to the special game state (first BB state) occurs. prepared,
The processing execution means is configured to execute the profit giving processing when an execution trigger is triggered in the special game state,
The limit setting means, when the profit giving process resulting in the giving of profit in the special game state is not executed, the game state after the end of the special game state is the advantageous section. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the restricted state is set.

According to the feature E3, when the transition to the special game state occurs, the game section is set as the advantageous section, and the profit giving process is executed by being triggered in the special game state. As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the transition to the special game state. Further, when the profit granting process corresponding to the granting of profit is not executed in the special game state, the game state after the end of the special game state is the advantageous section and the restricted state is set. state. As a result, the advantageous section is maintained even after the end of the special game state, and the special game state ends when the profit giving process corresponding to the giving of the profit is not executed. It is possible to prevent the predetermined notification from being performed in the later advantageous section.

Feature E4. Advantageous interval setting means (mainly in the first embodiment) for setting a game interval to the advantageous interval based on the occurrence of a specific event (SB winning data is set) in the interval where the game interval is not the advantageous interval A function of executing the processing of step S1411 in the side MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of step S2804 in the main side MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment),
The gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, wherein the process executing means does not execute the profit giving process even if the specific event occurs in the advantageous section.

According to feature E4, the game section is set as an advantageous section based on the occurrence of a specific event in a section that is not an advantageous section. Then, with the configuration of the feature E2, the profit giving process is executed based on the game section being set as the advantageous section. As a result, the player expects that the specific event will occur in the non-advantageous section. Also, even if a specific event occurs in the advantageous section, the profit giving process is not executed. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the predetermined notification is not executed and the profit giving process is not executed even if the specific event occurs by setting the situation to be the advantageous section and the restricted situation.

Feature E5. Under at least one condition that a specific event (SB winning data is set) occurs in a situation where the game state is a specific state (post-bonus state ST3), the game state is changed from the specific state to another game state (first preparation state). ST4) (function for executing the processing of step S803 in the main MPU 72),
The process execution means is configured to determine, when the profit giving process is executed in response to the occurrence of the specific event in the specific state, the profit giving process in the profit giving process. A gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features E2 to E4.

According to the feature E5, when the specific state is entered, the transition to another game state does not occur unless the specific event occurs, and when the profit giving process is executed with the occurrence of the specific event in the specific state as a trigger. is determined to grant profits. As a result, the probability of receiving a benefit increases when the specific state occurs. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of the specific state.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or E5, wherein the occurrence of the specific event includes winning of a specific combination (index value IV in which SB winning data is set) in a combination lottery process.

According to the feature E6, the player who expects the execution of the profit giving process expects to win the specific combination in the combination lottery process. This makes it easier for the player who expects the execution of the profit giving process to understand the object to which attention should be paid.

Feature E7. In another game state (second preparation state ST5), when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination and the stop operation mode becomes the predetermined mode, the game state is changed to the player's advantage. state transition means (function for executing the processing of step S1005 in the main side MPU 72) for shifting to an advantageous game state (RT state ST6),
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the predetermined notification is notification for changing the stop operation mode to the predetermined mode.

According to feature E7, when a predetermined corresponding winning combination is won in the winning lottery process in an advantageous section, a predetermined notification is executed, and the game state changes to an advantageous gaming state by performing a stop operation in a mode corresponding to the predetermined notification. Transition. As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the execution of the predetermined notification in the advantageous section.

Feature E8. In the other gaming state and in the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval is determined based on the fact that although the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the winning combination, the stop operation mode does not become the predetermined mode. means for terminating (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1902 in the main MPU 72; in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2602 in the main MPU 72; in the seventh embodiment, the main The gaming machine according to feature E7, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S3002 in the side MPU 72, and a function of executing the processing of step S3203 in the main side MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment.

According to the feature E8, in the situation of the advantageous section, when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process but the stop operation mode does not become the predetermined mode, not only does the transition to the advantageous gaming state not occur. Advantageous period ends. As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the execution of the predetermined notification in the advantageous section.

Feature E9. Characteristic feature E7 or E8, characterized in that when the game section is not the advantageous section, the predetermined notification is not executed even if the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination in the other gaming state. game machine.

According to the feature E9, if the winning section is not in the advantageous section, the predetermined notification is not executed even if the predetermined corresponding combination is won. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the advantageous section.

For the configuration of features E1 to E9, any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C21, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Processing execution means for executing profit giving processing based on the fact that the game section has been set from the first section (normal section) to the second section (advantageous section) (executing lottery processing for transition to RT state ST6 in main side MPU 72 function) and
Section setting means (in the first embodiment, the main side a function of executing the process of step S1414 in the MPU 72);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F1, when a predetermined profit is given in the first section, the subsequent game section is set to the second section and set from the first section to the second section. Based on this, profit giving processing is executed. Thereby, when a predetermined profit is given, the profit giving process based on the setting from the first section to the second section can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the awarding of the predetermined profit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The section setting means sets the game section to be the second section when a special game state (first BB state) advantageous to the player is started as the provision of the predetermined profit. The gaming machine according to feature F1.

According to the feature F2, when a special game state advantageous to the player occurs, not only that but the game section is set to the second section. Then, the profit giving process is executed based on the setting for the second section. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the attention of the player to the start of the special game state.

Feature F3. The process execution means is characterized by executing the profit giving process when the special game state is started in the first section and set in the second section, and when the special game state is started. The gaming machine according to feature F2.

According to the feature F3, when the special game state occurs and the game section is set to the second section, the profit giving process is executed at the start of the special game state. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player at the timing when the special game state is started.

Feature F4. The process executing means provides the profit based on occurrence of an execution opportunity (winning with index value IV=2 or 3 in BB state ST2) in the special game state and the second section. The gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized in that it executes a processing for use.

According to the feature F4, the profit giving process is executed not only at the timing when the special game state is started but also after the start of the special game state based on the occurrence of the execution opportunity. This makes it possible to increase the attention of the player not only at the start of the special game state but also after the start.

Feature F5. The process executing means, when the execution opportunity is not determined in the profit granting process executed when the special game state is started (transition to the RT state ST6) is not determined. The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein the profit giving process is executed based on what has occurred.

According to the feature F5, on the condition that the provision of the special profit is not determined in the profit provision processing at the start of the special game state, the profit provision processing is executed in response to the subsequent occurrence of the execution opportunity. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the special benefits from being duplicated.

Feature F6. The processing execution means provides an execution trigger (an index value IV in the BB state ST2 = Characteristic features F3 to F5 characterized by executing a process (lottery process for increasing the continuation rate in the main side MPU 72) that enables the provision of a specific profit based on the occurrence of the winning in 2 or 3) 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the feature F6, when the special profit is determined in the profit giving process at the start of the special game state, the specific profit can be given based on the occurrence of the execution opportunity after the start of the special game state. This makes it possible to increase the attention of the player not only at the start of the special game state but also after the start.

Feature F7. Any one of the characteristics F1 to F6, wherein the process execution means does not execute the profit giving process when the special game state is started in the second section, or when the special game state is started. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature F7, the profit giving process is not executed when the special game state is started in the situation where the second section has already started. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of starting the special game state in the first section.

Feature F8. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, characterized in that the probability of giving the predetermined profit is constant among a plurality of stages of set values that give a difference in the advantage of the gaming machine.

According to the feature F8, the profit granting process is executed with the granting of a predetermined profit having a constant granting probability among the set values of a plurality of stages. It is possible to make it difficult to produce advantages or disadvantages.

Feature F9. means for setting the gaming state after the predetermined profit is granted to a specific state (post-bonus state ST3) (function for executing the process of step S1714 in the main side MPU 72);
Under at least one condition that a specific event (SB winning data is set) occurs in a situation where the game state is the specific state, the specific state is shifted to another game state (first preparation state ST4). means (function for executing the process of step S803 in the main MPU 72);
with
The section setting means sets the game section to be the second section based on the occurrence of the specific event in the situation of the first section,
When the profit granting process is executed in response to the occurrence of the specific event in the specific state, the process executing means determines granting of the special profit in the profit granting process. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8, characterized by:

According to the feature F9, when a specific state is entered after a predetermined profit is awarded, the game state does not shift to another game state unless a specific event occurs, and the specific event occurs in a certain situation in the first section. becomes the second section based on Then, when a specific event occurs in a specific state, the game section changes from the first section to the second section, and the profit giving process is executed, it is decided to give a special profit. That is, when the game section after the predetermined profit is awarded is the first section, the probability that the special profit is awarded increases. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the game section after the predetermined profit is awarded is the first section.

Feature F10. Means (a function of making a negative determination in step S1413 in the main side MPU 72) for making the game section after the award of the profit (second BB state) different from the predetermined profit is the first section. The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, characterized in that

According to the feature F10, when the predetermined profit is awarded, the game section becomes the second section, whereas the game section after the profit different from the predetermined profit is awarded is maintained in the first section. Also, even if the above-mentioned different profit is awarded, the transition of the game section from the first section to the second section does not occur. do not have. As a result, it is possible to vary the setting mode of the game section according to the type of profit to be given, and also to vary the execution mode of the profit giving process.

Feature F11. The gaming machine according to feature F10, wherein the probabilities of providing the different benefits are different between a first set value and a second set value that give a difference in the advantage of the gaming machine.

According to the feature F11, the benefit granting process is not executed when a benefit having different granting probabilities is applied to the first set value and the second set value. Or it becomes possible to make it difficult to produce a disadvantage.

Feature F12. means for setting the game state after the award of the different profit to a specific state (post-bonus state ST3) (function for executing the processing of step S1805 in the main side MPU 72);
Under at least one condition that a specific event (SB winning data is set) occurs in a situation where the game state is the specific state, the specific state is shifted to another game state (first preparation state ST4). means (function for executing the process of step S803 in the main MPU 72);
with
The section setting means sets the game section to be the second section based on the occurrence of the specific event in the situation of the first section,
When the profit granting process is executed in response to the occurrence of the specific event in the specific state, the process executing means determines granting of the special profit in the profit granting process. The gaming machine according to feature F10 or F11, characterized by:

According to the feature F12, when the specific state is entered after the different benefits are awarded, the game state does not shift to another game state unless the specific event occurs, and the specific event occurs in a certain situation in the first section. becomes the second section based on Then, when a specific event occurs in a specific state, the game section changes from the first section to the second section, and the profit giving process is executed, it is decided to give a special profit. In addition, the game section after the different profit is given in the first section is maintained in the first section. As a result, when the above-mentioned different benefit is given, the probability that the special benefit will be given after that is increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the awarding of the different benefits.

For the configuration of features F1 to F12, any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C21, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. The game section is set to the second section (advantageous section) under at least one condition that a specific event (SB winning data is set) occurs in a situation where the game section is the first section (normal section). section setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1411 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2804 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment);
a processing execution means (a function of executing a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 in the main side MPU 72) for executing a profit giving process based on the fact that the game section is set to the second section;
A state transition means ( a function of executing the process of step S803 in the main MPU 72;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G1, the game section is set to the second section under at least one condition that a specific event has occurred in the situation of the first section. Then, the profit giving process is executed based on the fact that the game section is set to the second section. As a result, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the specific event in the first section. Further, the game state is shifted from the specific state to another game state under at least one condition that a specific event has occurred in a situation where the game state is the specific state. That is, the condition that the game section shifts from the first section to the second section and the condition that the game state shifts from the specific state to another game state overlap as occurrence of the specific event. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the game section shifts from the first section to the second section and the game state shifts from the specific state to another game state based on the occurrence of the specific event, thereby improving the interest in the game. It becomes possible to plan

Feature G2. Conditions for setting the game section from the first section to the second section by the section setting means, and conditions for shifting the game state from the specific state to the another game state by the state transition means The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the conditions are common in that it is necessary for the specific event to occur, but are different in other respects.

According to feature G2, when a specific event occurs, both the setting from the first section to the second section and the transition from the specific state to another game state occur, or only one of these occurs. It is possible to create a case where As a result, it is possible to diversify the setting situation of the combination of the game section and the game state.

Feature G3. setting the game section from the first section to the second section by the section setting means; and shifting the game state from the specific state to the another game state by the state transition means. Described in feature G1 or G2, characterized in that one occurs when the specific event occurs, and the other occurs when the specific event occurs and another event (SB winning is not established) also occurs. game machine.

According to feature G3, when only the specific event occurs, only one of the setting from the first section to the second section and the transition from the specific state to another game state occurs, and the specific event and the other event occur. When both occur, both the setting from the first section to the second section and the transition from the specific state to another game state occur. As a result, it is possible to diversify the setting situation of the combination of the game section and the game state.

Feature G4. The process execution means is configured to determine, when the profit giving process is executed in response to the occurrence of the specific event in the specific state, the profit giving process in the profit giving process. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features G1 to G3.

According to the feature G4, when the specific state is entered, the transition to another game state does not occur unless the specific event occurs, and when the profit giving process is executed with the occurrence of the specific event in the specific state as a trigger. is determined to grant profits. As a result, the probability of receiving a benefit increases when the specific state occurs. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of the specific state.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the state transition means sets a game state after a predetermined profit (BB state ST2) is awarded as the specific state.

According to the feature G5, the game state after a predetermined profit is awarded becomes a specific state, and in the specific state, the occurrence of a specific event is set as at least one condition to shift to another game state. Further, the game section is set from the first section to the second section under at least one condition that a specific event has occurred, and the profit giving process is executed based on the fact that the second section is set. As a result, after a predetermined profit is provided, the game section is set to the second section and the specific state exists as a game state to stay until the profit giving process is executed. can be associated in a configuration in which each exists.

Feature G6. The interval setting means is
A first setting means (a function of making a negative determination in step S1413 in the main side MPU 72) for making the game section after the predetermined profit is awarded the first section;
a second setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1414 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the game interval after the predetermined profit is granted to be the second interval;
The gaming machine according to feature G5, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G6, in the configuration in which the game state after the predetermined profit is awarded is the specific state, the case where the game section after the predetermined profit is awarded is the first section or the second section exists. As a result, when a specific event occurs in a specific state, the game section is set from the first section to the second section and the profit giving process is executed, and the game section is maintained at the second section and the profit is given. It is possible to create a situation in which the processing is not executed.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G5 or G6, wherein the predetermined benefit is a special game state (BB state ST2) advantageous to the player.

According to feature G7, after the special game state advantageous to the player ends, the game state becomes a specific state, and in the specific state, a specific event occurs and the game section is set from the first section to the second section. In that case, the profit giving process is executed. As a result, it is possible to collect situations that are advantageous for the player in a short period of time.

Feature G8. The predetermined benefits include a first predetermined benefit (second BB state) and a second predetermined benefit (first BB state),
The first setting means sets the game section after the first predetermined profit is awarded to the first section,
The gaming machine according to feature G6 or G7, wherein the second setting means sets the game interval after the second predetermined profit is awarded to be the second interval.

According to the feature G8, depending on the type of profit given as the predetermined profit, there are cases where the game section after the predetermined profit is granted is the first section or the second section. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which the specified state is the first section and a situation in which the specific state is the second section as the situation after the predetermined profit is granted, It is possible to associate each of these situations with the type of benefit given as a predetermined benefit. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game situations, and even if the game situations are diversified, it is possible to make the setting contents of each situation easy for the player to understand.

Feature G9. The second setting means sets the game section from the first section to the second section when the second predetermined profit is awarded in the first section,
The process executing means executes the profit awarding process based on the fact that the game zone is set from the first zone to the second zone triggered by the awarding of the second predetermined profit. The gaming machine according to feature G8, characterized by:

According to feature G9, when the second predetermined profit is awarded in the first section, even if no specific event has occurred, the second predetermined profit is set in the second section and the profit Grant processing is executed. As a result, when the second predetermined profit is awarded, it is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the profit giving process even if the specific state does not occur in the first section.

Feature G10. the probability that the first predetermined profit is provided is different between a first set value and a second set value that give a difference in the advantage of the gaming machine,
The gaming machine according to feature G9, wherein the probability that the second predetermined profit is granted is constant among a plurality of stages of set values that give a difference in the advantage of the gaming machine.

According to the feature G10, when the first predetermined profit is given with different giving probabilities between the first set value and the second set value, the profit giving process is not executed, and the giving probabilities are set between the set values in a plurality of stages. By executing the profit giving process triggered by the giving of the constant second predetermined profit, it is possible to make it difficult for the setting values to be advantageous or disadvantageous in terms of the execution frequency of the profit giving process.

Feature G11. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G10, wherein the probability of occurrence of the specific event is constant among a plurality of types of set values that give a difference in the advantage of the gaming machine.

According to the feature G11, the profit giving process is executed in response to the occurrence of a specific event whose occurrence probability is constant among the set values of a plurality of stages, so that there is an advantage between the set values in terms of the execution frequency of the profit giving process. Or it becomes possible to make it difficult to produce a disadvantage.

Feature G12. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G11, wherein the specific event includes winning a specific combination in a combination lottery process.

According to the feature G12, the player who expects the execution of the profit giving process expects to win the specific combination in the lottery process of the combination in the situation of the first section. This makes it easier for the player who expects the execution of the profit giving process to understand the object to which attention should be paid.

For the configuration of features G1 to G12, any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C21, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G12 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, the feature group D, the feature group E, the feature group F, and the feature group G, the following problems can be solved. is.

A slot machine is one type of gaming machine. The slot machine has a plurality of reels, and a part of the plurality of symbols provided on the outer periphery of each reel can be visually recognized through a display window. When a player bets game media such as medals and operates a start lever, each reel starts rotating, and after each reel starts rotating, each reel stops sequentially by operating a stop button.

In addition, inside the slot machine, a lottery is performed on condition that the game medium is bet and the start lever is operated. A predetermined number of game media are paid out under the condition that the game is stopped.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The above problems are not limited to slot machines, but also apply to gaming machines that use game balls as game media, for example.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: The rotation of the rotating body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the rotating body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player responds to the pattern after the stop. A game machine that gives benefits to

10... Slot machine 31... Reel unit 41... Start lever 42 to 44... Stop button 72... Main side MPU 92... Production side MPU ST1... Normal state ST2... BB state ST3... Post-bonus state ST4... First preparation state, ST5... Second preparation state, ST6... RT state.

Claims (1)

Section setting means for setting the game section to a second section under at least one condition that a specific event has occurred in a situation where the game section is the first section;
a process executing means for executing a profit giving process based on the fact that the game section is set to the second section;
state transition means for transitioning from the specific state to another game state under at least one condition that the specific event occurs in a situation where the game state is the specific state;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images